Cheerful Choices

  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
menu icon
go to homepage
  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
search icon
Homepage link
  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
×

Air Fryer Tortilla Pizza

February 13, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

This Tortilla Pizza recipe is perfect for anyone craving a quick meal with everyday ingredients. Customize it to suit your taste and dietary needs with your choice of cheese and veggies. Finally, top it with the star of the show-Beyond Steak, which are healthy plant-based steak bites packed with protein.

Air fryer tortilla pizza with cheese and vegetable toppings.

Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Beyond Meat. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • What is Beyond Steak?
    • Is Beyond Steak healthy?
  • Make a heart pizza for Valentine's Day
  • Make a christmas tree for the holidays
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you make air fryer tortilla pizza?
    • 1. Spread sauce
    • 2. Add cheese
    • 3. Add veggies
    • 4. Top with Beyond Steak
    • 5. Air fry until crispy
    • 6. Air fry until crispy
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Can I cook it in an oven or skillet?
    • Cook tortilla pizza in the oven
    • Cook tortilla pizza on a skillet
  • Customize it your way
    • Flavor combos to try
  • Can I make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this air fryer tortilla pizza recipe on pinterest:
  • try these other air fryer recipes too:

Why you'll love it

There's something special about making pizza at home, and this Air Fryer Tortilla Pizza takes it to the next level with its simplicity and versatility. Here's why you'll come back to this recipe over and over:

  • Quick and Easy: With just a few minutes of prep and cooking time, you'll have a crispy, delicious pizza that beats any store-bought frozen alternative.
  • Customizable: Whether you're a vegetarian or vegan, this recipe can be adapted to your dietary preferences. 
  • Healthy: Using a tortilla as the base makes for a lighter pizza that's just as satisfying. Plus, loading up on veggies adds a nutritional punch too.
Holding up piece of tortilla pizza

What is tortilla pizza?

Tortilla pizza is a quick and versatile alternative to traditional pizza. You'll use a tortilla as the base instead of dough. It's perfect to throw together for a super easy lunch or dinner.

Is tortilla pizza healthy?

Tortilla pizza can be a healthier alternative to traditional pizza. We're using tortillas to create a super thin, lower carb crust. Then, you'll pile on a generous portion of vegetables for vitamins, minerals, and fiber.

Plus, we're using Beyond Steak which is a nourishing protein option, created using a blend of faba bean protein and wheat gluten.

What is Beyond Steak?

Beyond Steak
Beyond Steak air fryer pizza

I tried Beyond Steak last year and absolutely fell in love with its taste, texture, and nutrition. 

Beyond Steak is a plant-based protein designed to mimic the taste, texture, and cooking experience of traditional beef steak. When you flip over the ingredients, you'll notice a line of simple ingredients including faba bean protein, wheat gluten, and pomegranate concentrate. It's truly such a great option for those looking to reduce their meat consumption or even those looking for a fun, new protein source.

Air fryer pizza with steak

Is Beyond Steak healthy?

As a registered dietitian, I love incorporating this plant-based steak into meals because it provides 21 grams of protein and just 1 gram of saturated fat per serving. It's also filled with beneficial nutrients like potassium, iron, and fiber. It's even certified by the American Heart Association's heart-check program, meeting the strict nutrition guidelines to be considered a heart-healthy food!

Recent research has shown replacing red meat with high-quality plant protein sources including plant-based meat may help lower LDL ("bad") cholesterol levels. Other studies have demonstrated diets rich in plant foods can potentially reduce the risk of heart disease and cancer.

You can find Beyond Steak in the frozen section of your local grocery store. For this recipe we're adding it straight from frozen onto the pizza. For most other recipes, you'll simply pan saute it or air fry it for 5-6 minutes before enjoying.

Make a heart pizza for Valentine's Day

For a special Valentine's Day meal, you can create heart-shaped tortilla pizzas. Print out a large stencil and cut around it to shape your tortilla into a heart. Then, follow the same directions to create a fun Valentine's Day pizza that's as delightful to look at as it is to eat.

Heart shape pizza
Heart shape tortilla pizza for Valentine's Day

Make a christmas tree for the holidays

For a festive holiday twist, you can create tree-shaped tortilla pizzas! Simply print out a large tree stencil or use a tree-shaped cookie cutter to cut your tortillas into holiday-inspired shapes. Then, follow the same steps to assemble and bake your pizzas for a fun and festive treat that's as cheerful as it is delicious. Perfect for holiday parties or a cozy Christmas movie night!

IMG 8468

What ingredients do you need?

  • Tortillas (8 inches): The perfect canvas for your pizza masterpiece. Its size ensures a satisfying serving without overdoing it. We often use whole wheat tortillas for their added fiber and nutrients.
  • Pizza Sauce: Use 2 tablespoons to spread as the base. Feel free to explore other sauce options like pesto or white sauce for a twist too.
  • Cheese: Try mozzarella, cheddar, or a blend. Vegan options work great too!
  • Vegetables: Feel free to use just 1 veggie or a variety. This is a perfect way to use up any random bits of veggies in your fridge. 
  • Beyond Steak: A hearty plant-based protein addition. We love to keep this in our freezer at all times for a convenient protein option.
  • Italian Seasoning: This seasoning helps bring all the pizza flavors together.
Customizable ingredients
Veggies of your choice

How do you make air fryer tortilla pizza?

Forget spending hours making homemade pizza. This recipe comes together in 10 minutes or less. Here's how:

1. Spread sauce

To start, spread a thin layer of pizza sauce over the entire surface of a large tortilla, leaving a small border around the edges to prevent the sauce from spilling over. 

Spread sauce on tortilla

2. Add cheese

Next, sprinkle a generous amount of cheese over the sauce. Whether you prefer mozzarella, cheddar, or a vegan alternative, the cheese acts as the glue that holds all your toppings in place.

Add cheese on tortilla

3. Add veggies

Following the cheese, layer your chosen vegetables on top. Bell peppers, onions, and mushrooms offer a fantastic mix of textures and flavors, but feel free to get creative with whatever veggies you have on hand.

Add veggies on tortilla

4. Top with Beyond Steak

For the protein, add Beyond Steak. This adds a hearty element to your pizza and is perfect to enjoy for a meatless meal.

Add plant based steak on tortilla

5. Air fry until crispy

Finally, place your tortilla pizza in the air fryer and cook until the edges are crispy and the cheese is perfectly melted, usually about 6 minutes. This cooking method ensures a crispy base and bubbly top.

Before air frying
After air frying

6. Air fry until crispy

Letting the pizza cool allows it to get extra crispy. Try not to skip this step. If you don't have a cookie rack, you can even just let it cool in the air fryer basket.

Air-fried tortilla pizza with steak tips and cheese on cooling rack

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Complement your air fryer pizza with a side of chopped leafy green salad or veggie sticks and dip.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: Make sure to follow the amounts and not overload your tortilla. This helps prevent it from becoming soggy. 
  • Double Tortillas: For those seeking a thicker crust, try using two tortillas on the bottom. Apply a thin layer of sauce (1 tablespoon) on the first tortilla, then press another tortilla on top and continue with the standard 2 tablespoons of sauce.
  • Scaling Tips: Feel free to make as many individual pizzas as you need. You'll just need to cook them in batches.
Sliced tortilla pizza with Beyond Steak and colorful vegetables.

Can I cook it in an oven or skillet?

If you don't have an air fryer, don't worry! You can still enjoy delicious tortilla pizzas by using an oven or skillet. Here's how:

Cook tortilla pizza in the oven

  1. Set your oven to 425°F.
  2. On a baking sheet, lay out the tortilla and top with sauce, your choice of cheese, vegetables, and Beyond Steak.
  3. Place in the oven for about 8 minutes, or until the edges are crispy and the cheese has melted.
  4. Before serving, let it rest on the pan outside of the oven for 2 minutes.

Cook tortilla pizza on a skillet

  1. Warm up a skillet over medium-high heat.
  2. Place the tortilla in the skillet, cooking for 2 minutes on one side to get it crispy.
  3. Flip the tortilla over and top with sauce, cheese, veggies, and Beyond Steak.
  4. Cook for another 2 minutes or until the cheese is melted and gooey.
Sliced tortilla pizza with Beyond Steak and colorful vegetables.

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this tortilla pizza recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese and veggies you want to use. 

  • Cheese of your choice: Use mozzarella for a classic, melty experience; cheddar for a sharper taste; or a vegan cheese alternative for those following a dairy-free diet. 
  • Veggies of your choice: The options are truly endless here. Just be sure to use a quick-cooking option rather than a harder vegetable like sweet potato or carrots. 
  • Other sauce options: Beyond traditional pizza sauce, you could also try pesto, BBQ, or a creamy white sauce to mix things up.
Cutting pizza

Flavor combos to try

Can't decide what to top your pizza with? Here are a few classic pizza combos you'll love:

  • Pizza sauce, vegan mozzarella cheese, diced broccoli
  • Pesto sauce, mozzarella cheese, diced tomatoes
  • BBQ sauce, cheddar cheese, red onion
  • Enchilada sauce, mexican cheese, bell peppers
Healthy tortilla pizza

Can I make it ahead of time?

Absolutely! Assemble your pizza but don't cook it. Store it in the fridge until you're ready, then follow the cooking instructions. Perfect for meal prep!

How do I store leftovers?

Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge. For reheating, pop it back in the air fryer for 2 minutes to restore its crispy texture.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Tortilla Pizza 19
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Air Fryer Tortilla Pizza

This Tortilla Pizza recipe is perfect for anyone craving a quick meal with everyday ingredients. Customize it with your choice of cheese and veggies!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Course: Main Dish Choices
Cuisine: Italian
Keyword: valentines
Servings: 1 individual pizza
Calories: 430kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Large Air Fryer

Ingredients

  • 1 large tortilla (8 inches in diameter)
  • 2 tablespoons pizza sauce
  • ½ cup shredded cheese of your choice (Use a vegan cheese to make this completely plant-based or choose other cheese options like mozzarella, cheddar, mexican blend, or parmesan)
  • ½ cup quick cooking vegetables of your choice, diced into ¼″ pieces (zucchini, yellow squash, bell peppers, broccoli, corn, tomatoes, onions, mushrooms, or a mixture)
  • ¼ cup Beyond Steak (You can add it right from frozen onto the pizza)
  • ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning, for garnish
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Preheat your air fryer to 390°F by heating the basket with nothing in it for 2 minutes.
  • On the tortilla, evenly spread a thin layer of pizza sauce, then add shredded cheese, vegetables, and Beyond Steak on top. Gently press everything down to adhere.
  • Carefully add to preheated air fryer basket and cook for 6 minutes, until edges are crispy and cheese is melted.
  • Gently remove pizza with a large spatula and set on a cooling rack. Let cool for 2 minutes before cutting into fourths.
  • Repeat steps to make more tortilla pizzas.

Notes

Reheating Note: To reheat any leftovers, you can warm pizza in a preheated air fryer at 390°F for 2 minutes, let cool briefly, then enjoy. Leftover tortilla pizza can also be enjoyed cold.

Nutrition

Serving: 1pizza | Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 930mg | Potassium: 570mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 6g | Calcium: 520mg | Iron: 2.4mg

save this air fryer tortilla pizza recipe on pinterest:

Ready-to-eat air fryer tortilla pizza

try these other air fryer recipes too:

  • Air Fried Chickpeas
  • Air Fryer Snap Peas
  • Air Fryer Corn Fritters
  • Breakfast Burritos made in the air fryer

3 Ingredient Frozen Burrito Casserole

February 8, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

Short on time but still craving a delicious weeknight dinner? Try this Frozen Burrito Casserole uses ready-to-go burritos as the base layered with enchilada sauce and cheese. Plus, you get to add any toppings of your choice! This convenient and super simple recipe using frozen burrito is one that the whole family will love.

Simple burrito casserole on a green towel using frozen burritos.

(Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Are frozen burritos healthy?
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you make this take on frozen burritos enchiladas?
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can you prepare this burrito casserole ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this frozen burrito casserole recipe on pinterest:
  • try these easy one pan recipes too:

Why you'll love it

  • Time-Saving: With just 5 minutes of prep time, this casserole is a lifesaver on busy days. Simply pop it in the oven and you'll have a scrumptious meal ready in no time.
  • Customizable: Whether you're a fan of fiber-filled beans, creamy guacamole, or zesty corn salsa, this recipe lets you personalize the toppings to suit your taste buds.
Holding out a plate for lunch of frozen burrito enchilada

What is a frozen burrito casserole?

This recipe with frozen burritos is sort of like a simplified take on enchiladas. Let's be clear: we are by no stretch saying it's an authentic enchilada. However, it is a way to "hack" it and create a similar concept in just a matter of minutes.

Are frozen burritos healthy?

Frozen burritos can be a convenient and nourishing option, depending on the brand. Opt for burritos filled with veggies, beans, and/or lean meats to get a good dose of protein and fiber. I love grabbing burritos from Red's All Natural in the frozen section. In fact, this is the brand we've used in these photos. Boost the nutrient content by adding chopped veggies on top like green or sweet peppers, tomatoes, green onions or even any type of chopped lettuce you have on hand. Make it your own!

Freshly baked burrito casserole with avocado and salsa.

What ingredients do you need?

You really only need 3 simple ingredients to create the base for this recipe.

  • Burritos: Choose your favorite burritos, be it bean, cheese, or meat-filled. They are the star of this dish.
  • Green Enchilada Sauce: This brings a tangy, slightly spicy flavor to the casserole.
  • Monterey Jack Cheese: Melts beautifully, adding a creamy, gooey texture.
All ingredients on white background

How do you make this take on frozen burritos enchiladas?

  • Prep the Oven and Dish: Preheat your oven to 425°F and lightly coat a baking dish with cooking spray and a bit of enchilada sauce.
  • Layer the Ingredients: Place the burritos in the dish, pour over the enchilada sauce, and sprinkle with cheese.
  • Bake to Perfection: Cover with foil and bake for 30 minutes. Then remove the foil and bake for another 10 minutes until the cheese is bubbly and golden.
  • Add Toppings: Serve hot with your choice of toppings like salsa, avocado, or a dollop of Greek yogurt.
Frozen burritos in pan to bake
Frozen burritos in pan to bake with cheese on top
Frozen baked burritos in pan

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair with a side of Spanish rice or a simple green salad for a complete meal. A watermelon lime mocktail would make a great drink to have with it too!
  • Troubleshooting Tips: This recipe often cooks up a bit faster if you let the frozen burritos set out in the fridge overnight to partially thaw before cooking.
  • Scaling Tips: You can double the recipe but you'll want to use two separate pans or one extra large pan.

Customize it your way

Like all of our recipes, this Frozen Burrito Casserole is completely customizable. You get to choose which toppings and burrito fillings you want to use. Here are some ideas to try:

  • Burrito of your choice: Choose a smaller frozen burrito around 4 ounces as this will cook quicker. Feel free to pick bean, cheese, chicken, beef, sausage, or any flavor that's calling your name! We often like to grab Red's All Natural burritos with high quality ingredients!
  • Toppings of your choice: The sky's the limit! Try black beans, diced avocado, guacamole, diced tomatoes, salsa, fresh chopped cilantro, sour cream, plain Greek yogurt, or lime slices. These toppings are identical to ones we recommend in our nacho bar guide!
  • Sauce of your choice: Feel free to use either red enchilada sauce or green enchilada sauce. We're tested this recipe with both and can't decide what we like better. 
Toppings of your choice

Can you prepare this burrito casserole ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare this frozen burrito casserole in advance by prepping everything without baking it. Cover it with foil and refrigerate it for up to 8 hours. Yes, it's okay if the burritos start to thaw slightly.

When you're ready to serve it, bake it according to the recipe instructions.

Cheesy baked burrito dish with toppings

How do I store leftovers?

Since we're using frozen burritos for this recipe, the tortillas can often become a bit harder when they cool off. That's why this casserole is best enjoyed right away if possible. If you do end up with leftovers, you can store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Then, reheat in the microwave for 1 minute before enjoying.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Frozen Burrito Casserole 7
Print Recipe
Be the first to rate this recipe!

Frozen Burrito Casserole

This casserole uses ready-to-go burritos as the base layered with enchilada sauce and cheese. Plus, you get to add any toppings of your choice!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Course: Main Dish Choices
Cuisine: Mexican
Servings: 5 servings
Calories: 400kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish
  • 8"x8" pan baking dish

Ingredients

  • Cooking spray
  • 15 ounce can red or green enchilada sauce
  • 5 frozen burritos of your choice (When testing this, I used Red's All Natural Burritos which are ~4 ounces in size)
  • 1 cup shredded cheese of your choice (cheddar cheese, mozzarella, monterey jack, pepper jack, Mexican blend, etc.)

Toppings of your choice:

  • Guacamole
  • Diced avocado
  • Salsa
  • Queso
  • Sour cream or plain Greek yogurt
  • Diced tomatoes
  • Sliced jalapeños
  • Chopped green onions
  • Sliced black olives
  • Corn kernels
  • Diced onion
  • Pickled red onion
  • Chopped cilantro
  • Sliced radishes
  • Shredded lettuce
  • Fresh limes, for squeezing over
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Heat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Spray a 8x8 or 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish with cooking spray.
  • Add a thin layer of enchilada sauce to the bottom of the pan.
  • Unwrap frozen burritos and place in the dish over the thin layer of sauce. Then, evenly cover with the rest of the can of enchilada sauce. Top with shredded cheese.
  • Cover the pan with foil and bake for 30 minutes, then remove foil and bake for 10 more minutes, until cheese is golden and burritos are cooked through. (The internal temperature should reach ~165ºF.)
  • Serve casserole with any toppings of your choice.

Notes

Toppings Ideas: View our Amazon storefront to see tons of toppings ideas!
Storage Note: If you have any leftovers, store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in the microwave for 60 seconds before enjoying.
Flavor Combo Note: Not sure which sauce, burritos, and cheese combos go together? Here’s a few to try:
  • Green enchilada sauce + Cilantro lime chicken burritos + Monterey Jack cheese
  • Red enchilada sauce + Bean and cheese burritos + Cheddar cheese
  • Green enchilada sauce + Steak burritos + Pepper Jack cheese

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 400kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 20g | Sodium: 1160mg | Fiber: 2g

save this frozen burrito casserole recipe on pinterest:

Ready-to-eat burrito bake with spatula in the pan

try these easy one pan recipes too:

  • Italian Meatloaf
  • Sheet Pan Sausage and Green Beans
  • Sushi Bake

Customizable Nacho Bar – 4 Ingredients of Choice

February 7, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

A Nacho Bar is perfect to set up for impromptu gatherings, game day parties, or cozy movie nights at home. Customize with your choice of chips, protein, cheese, and toppings. Whether you're feeding a crowd or just treating yourself, this nachos bar will be a hit!

A delectable combination of crunchy chips and toppings, ready for game day.

(Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Are nachos healthy?
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you set up a nacho bar?
    • 1. Set out chips of your choice
    • 2. Offer protein of your choice
    • 3. Arrange various cheeses of your choice
    • 4. Pile on the toppings of your choice
  • Can you set up a nacho bar ahead of time?
  • Once you have everything prepped, how do you assemble the nachos?
    • 1. Start with the chips
    • 2. Distribute protein
    • 3. Add cheese
    • 4. Microwave and add toppings
  • Can you bake nachos in the oven?
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this nacho bar guide on pinterest:
  • Check out these game day recipes too:

Why you'll love it

  • Versatility: One of the best parts about this recipe is its customizable options. Whether you prefer certain chips or protein, this recipe caters to all.
  • Protein-Packed: With a range of proteins from ground beef to tofu, these nachos ensure everyone creates a hearty and satisfying meal.
  • Cheesy Goodness: Who doesn't love cheese? With options ranging from classic shredded cheddar to crumbled feta, there's a cheesy delight for every palate.
  • Party Perfect: A nacho bar is the ultimate crowd-pleaser. It's a casual, fun, and engaging way to serve food, especially during events like Super Bowl parties or family gatherings.
A plate of customizable nachos, showcasing a blend of savory and fresh ingredients next to lime margarita.

What is a nacho bar?

A nacho bar is a fun, interactive meal set up. Guests get to play chef and mix and match from the spread. It's a surefire way to satisfy all tastes and add a playful twist to your event!

Are nachos healthy?

They absolutely can be! With the right choices like chips in moderation, lean proteins, and plenty of veggies, nachos can be a balanced meal. You can even swap chips for a crunchy lettuce base for a taco salad option.

All nacho bar ingredients displayed for game day

What ingredients do you need?

  • Chips: Choose from white corn tortilla chips, blue corn chips, bean chips, grain-free tortilla chips, or sweet potato chips. Remember, the type of chip can influence the overall flavor and healthiness of your nachos.
  • Protein: Options include ground beef, shredded chicken, pulled pork, ground turkey, Beyond Steak, various beans, refried beans, tofu, and lentils. The protein not only adds flavor but also makes the nachos more filling and nutritious.
  • Cheese: Pick from shredded Mexican blend, cheddar, monterey jack, mozzarella, pepper jack, or crumbled feta. Cheese adds a rich, creamy texture and a boost of calcium.
  • Toppings: Here's where you can really get creative. Add guacamole, diced avocado, salsa, queso, Greek yogurt, tomatoes, jalapeños, onions, and more for a burst of flavor and nutrients.
A close up of a tempting dish of layered nachos with cheese, diced vegetables, and spicy jalapeños.

How do you set up a nacho bar?

In true Cheerful Choices fashion… you can customize this nacho bar with all types of ingredients "of your choice". Here's how to set up your party-ready nachos line-up.

1. Set out chips of your choice

Start with a diverse selection of chips. Offer everything from traditional corn tortilla chips to unique options like blue corn, sweet potato, or grain-free alternatives. Arrange them in large bowls or platters for easy access.

Chips of your choice on stone background

2. Offer protein of your choice

Next, prepare a variety of cooked and seasoned proteins. Don't be afraid to take shortcuts and buy pre-cooked options at the store. You can also view this guide for cooking all types of proteins like a pro. Include classics like seasoned ground beef or shredded chicken, and don't forget plant-based options like beans or tofu. Keep them warm in separate containers so guests can choose their favorite.

Protein of your choice on stone background

3. Arrange various cheeses of your choice

Offer a range of cheeses, from shredded cheddar and Mexican cheese to crumbled feta. You can also think about having a hot, melty queso sauce set up. 

Cheese of your choice on stone background

4. Pile on the toppings of your choice

Finally, create a rainbow of toppings-diced tomatoes, sliced jalapeños, olives, guacamole, sour cream, and more. Organize them in small bowls with spoons or tongs for easy serving, allowing everyone to customize their nacho masterpiece.

Toppings of your choice on stone background

Can you set up a nacho bar ahead of time?

Setting up a nacho bar ahead of time is simple! Just prep your toppings-chop veggies, cook meats, and shred cheese if needed. Place everything needed into individual containers and refrigerate. When it's party time, warm up the necessary items and lay out your fresh toppings and chips for an easy, breezy serving.

Close up of chip with ingredients on it

Once you have everything prepped, how do you assemble the nachos?

Like all of my other recipes, this Customizable Nacho Bar is completely adaptable. You get to hand pick every single ingredient you want to use. This means it can easily fit different dietary preferences and ingredients on hand. 

We recommend making the nachos in this order for a perfect bite every time. 

1. Start with the chips

Start with a couple of large handfuls of chips per serving-exact measurements aren't necessary but 2 cups is a good reference.

Adding tortilla chips to nacho plate

2. Distribute protein

Add whatever protein you decide on. You could even do a mixture of two different proteins.

Adding cooked protein over nachos

3. Add cheese

We like to add the cheese on top of the protein so it melts easier and envelopes all the ingredients under it.

Nacho Bar 9

4. Microwave and add toppings

Once everything is nice and melted and warmed through, you can add the cold toppings. Simple as that! This makes 1 individual serving, then you'll just have everyone repeat to create their unique nacho plate.

Adding diced tomato over nachos

Can you bake nachos in the oven?

If you're aiming to make a larger batch of nachos at once, baking them in the oven is always a good option. Follow the same directions of spreading out your chips, protein, and cheese on a baking sheet, then bake at 350°F (175°C) for about 5-7 minutes, or until the cheese is bubbly and golden.

Nachos on a sheet pan to bake in the oven

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair these nachos with a refreshing lime margarita or a cool glass of iced tea. They're great for game days, parties, or a fun family dinner.
  • Scaling Tips: Easily double or triple this recipe by adjusting the ingredient amounts proportionally. For larger batches, use an oven to bake the nachos evenly.
  • Keeping It Warm: Cooked meats and queso can be kept warm on the stovetop, mini crock pots or transferred to glass containers with a lid.
Freshly prepared nachos topped with melted cheese, juicy tomatoes, and creamy avocado.

How do I store leftovers?

Have extras left over from your nacho party? Store in airtight containers for up to 2 days in the fridge. 

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Nacho Bar 18
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Customizable Nacho Bar

This Nacho Bar is perfect for game day parties or cozy movie nights. Customize with your choice of chips, protein, cheese, and toppings! Putting together these nachos takes less than 5 minutes.
Prep Time3 minutes mins
Cook Time2 minutes mins
Course: Main Dish Choices
Cuisine: American
Keyword: party snack
Servings: 1 serving of nachos
Calories: 515kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

2 cups chips of your choice:

  • White corn tortilla chips
  • Blue corn chips
  • Bean chips
  • Grain-free tortilla chips
  • Sweet potato chips
  • Wilde Protein Chips

4 ounces (½ cup) protein of your choice:

  • Ground beef, cooked and seasoned
  • Shredded chicken, cooked and seasoned
  • Pulled pork, cooked and seasoned
  • Ground turkey, cooked and seasoned
  • Beyond Steak, cooked in pan or air fryer
  • Canned beans, black beans, pinto beans, kidney beans - drained and rinsed
  • Refried beans
  • Tofu, crumbled and sautéed
  • Lentils, cooked

¼ cup cheese of your choice:

  • Shredded Mexican blend cheese
  • Shredded cheddar cheese
  • Shredded monterey jack
  • Shredded mozzarella
  • Shredded pepper jack
  • Crumbled feta cheese

¼ cup toppings of your choice:

  • Guacamole
  • Diced avocado
  • Salsa
  • Queso
  • Sour cream or plain Greek yogurt
  • Diced tomatoes
  • Sliced jalapeños
  • Chopped green onions
  • Sliced black olives
  • Corn kernels
  • Diced onion
  • Pickled red onion
  • Chopped cilantro
  • Sliced radishes
  • Shredded lettuce
  • Lime wedges
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Spread the chips on a plate. Evenly distribute the cooked protein over the chips.
  • Sprinkle the cheese over the protein and chips. Microwave for 60-90 seconds until the cheese is melted and everything is warm.
  • Add toppings on top and serve immediately.
  • This will create an individual serving. Repeat as needed to create more servings.

Video

Notes

Oven Note: You can make nachos in the oven too. Simply quadruple (4x) the recipe amounts and add chips, protein, and cheese to this sheet pan. Then, bake in a preheated oven at 350°F (175°C) for about 5-7 minutes.
Seasoning Protein Note: For cooking and seasoning your protein, simply cook your chosen meat (like ground beef or turkey) or plant-based protein (like tofu or tempeh) in a skillet over medium heat until thoroughly cooked, then sprinkle in a bit of taco seasoning to evenly coat the protein.
Nutrition Note: Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for tortilla chips, chicken, Mexican cheese, tomato, and guac. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

Nutrition

Serving: 1plate of nachos | Calories: 515kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 40g | Fat: 25g | Sodium: 800mg | Potassium: 270mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 1g | Calcium: 290mg | Iron: 2.5mg

save this nacho bar guide on pinterest:

Create your own nacho bar for parties

Check out these game day recipes too:

  • Breadcrumb Baked Mac and Cheese
  • Stuffed Bell Peppers
  • Buffalo Chicken Zucchini Boats
  • Cheddar Jalapeno Poppers

40+ Healthy Desserts for One – Single Serve Desserts

February 1, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 3 Comments

Craving a quick and easy sweet to enjoy? We've rounded up 40+ single serving, healthy desserts for one! These mini desserts allow you to satisfy your sweet tooth without surrounding yourself with tempting sweets that stick around for days.

Natural Delights Snickers Dates 2
Salted Caramel Protein Energy Bites 9
Protein Mug Cake 2
Coconut Yogurt Bowl 11

This post was first published on May 3, 2022 and was written by Cheerful Choices contributors, Corrin Coons and Sydney Coons. It was updated on February 1, 2024 to include new recipes and helpful tips.

Table of Contents

  • Is dessert healthy?
  • Simple swaps to try
  • Perfect for Valentine's Day
  • 40+ healthy single serve desserts
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this single serve desserts guide on pinterest:

Is dessert healthy?

Ever felt like sweets were off limits because they weren't "healthy"? What if I told you that was all wrong? In fact, enjoying the desserts you know and love in moderation is one of the best ways to develop a sustainable and enjoyable eating pattern. 

Desserts are a key part of many cultures, holidays, and gatherings. It's really just all about balance. So go ahead and enjoy a slice of grandma's famous blueberry cobbler. 

Simple swaps to try

While it's completely okay to eat the desserts you already know and love in their full-fledged, original, fatty, and sugary goodness- there are many simple swaps you can make when preparing desserts to pump up the nutritional value while still satisfying your dessert cravings!

Here are some ways to modify dessert recipes to make more healthful alternatives:

  • Pump up the Protein: Add a scoop of protein powder or collagen peptides into baked goods like pancakes or banana bread.
  • Fill with Fiber: Replace all-purpose flour for whole wheat flour or other fiber-rich flours like chickpea or almond flour.
  • Swap out the Saturated Fat: Swap butter for applesauce or a heart-healthy oil. Applesauce can replace butter in a 1:1 ratio and you can typically replace 1 cup of butter with ¾ cup of oil.
  • Add Value through Vegetables: Add vitamins and minerals to your desserts by sneaking in shredded vegetables like zucchini or carrot into your favorite baked goods, You can also blend frozen cauliflower into flavorful smoothies without even knowing!

Perfect for Valentine's Day

Single serve desserts are the perfect match for a healthy Valentine's Day celebration, all while keeping the portions in check. These mini sweets allow you to treat yourself and your loved one to whatever you're craving, without overdoing it. Make these mini desserts instantly festive by adding over a dash of mini heart sprinkles or a couple drops of red food coloring!

40+ healthy single serve desserts

Without further ado-let's get into it! Here are single serve desserts to save and try this year.

Protein Mug Cake
This protein mug cake is just the sweet treat you've been looking for. It packs in 15 grams of protein-making it the perfect post workout snack, satisfying breakfast, or healthy dessert.
Get the Recipe
Protein Mug Cake 13
2 Minute Apple Pie Crunch
Craving something crunchy and sweet? This apple pie crunch is sure to satisfy both of those cravings and takes only 2 minutes to whip together!
Get Recipe
2 minute apple pie crunch 1
Date Snickers
These Date "Snickers" are a fun spin on a classic candy. This recipe calls for just 5 ingredients-Medjool dates, creamy peanut butter, crunchy peanuts, coconut oil, and melted chocolate of your choice.
Get Recipe
Snickers Date Recipe 4
Medjool Date Peanut Butter Eggs
Looking for Date Snickers best friend? Try the white chocolate version with these festive "easter egg" dates!
Get Recipe
Date Eggs 15
Chocolate Chip Mug Cookie
Want a moist and decadent chocolate chip cookie without having to wait for the oven? Try this chocolate chip mug cookie that can be made in the microwave in just a few minutes! Plus, this recipe is made without eggs or dairy, so it's allergen friendly!
Get Recipe
eggless mug cookie featured
Coconut Yogurt Bowl
Say hello to your new favorite easy breakfast! This coconut yogurt bowl calls for just 4 ingredients and only takes minutes to make.
Get Recipe
Coconut Yogurt Bowl 11 scaled
Chocolate Mousse with Passionfruit
This chocolate mousse features avocado as the secret ingredient and is topped with pomegranates and passionfruit to combine both chocolatey and fruity together in one amazing experience!
Get Recipe
Vegan Chocolate Mousse 6 scaled 1
Churro Custard Toast
This recipe takes toast to a whole new level! Creamy custard pairs with classic cinnamon and sugar to make a churro experience unlike any other!
Get Recipe
Churro Toast Featured Image 1 1024x1024 1
Single Serve Bananas Foster
Bananas smothered in a rum-flavored, buttery, caramel sauce? Sign us up! This dessert is super simple and perfect for any occasion!
Get Recipe
Single Serve Bananas Foster FB
Nut Butter Stuffed Dates
Looking for a sweet dessert that comes together in less than five minutes? Try these healthy, vegan stuffed dates filled with any nut butter and topping of your choice!
Get Recipe
Stuffed Dates 2 scaled
Stovetop Apple Crisp
There's nothing better than a warm, comforting apple crisp on a chilly fall day! Sweet apples combine with crunchy oats and pecans to make a truly magical experience!
Get Recipe
stovetop apple crisp
High Protein Black Bean Brownies
Enjoy the chocolatey, fudgey goodness that all brownie-lovers crave with the added benefit of some protein and fiber from the secret ingredient in these brownies: black beans!
Get Recipe
black bean brownies 8
Chocolate Orange Chia Pudding
Chocolate and orange are a match made in heaven! This recipe puts a lighter spin on pudding and is packed with calcium, magnesium, and phosphorus to promote bone health!
Get Recipe
Chocolate Orange Chia Pudding 8
Lemon Blueberry Overnight Oats
Breakfast meets dessert with these lemon blueberry overnight oats! This recipe is great to prepare the night before a busy morning and is super refreshing and satiating!
Get Recipe
IMG 6441 1200x628 1
Vegan Mug Brownie
This recipe is perfect for those late-night brownie cravings and can be made in just six minutes! Plus, it's rich, gooey, and chocolatey - everything you're looking for in a brownie!
Get Recipe
vegan mug brownie image 1200
Pumpkin Spice Protein Shake
Looking for the perfect pumpkin dessert? Look no further with this 5-ingredient pumpkin spice protein shake. Plus, this sweet shake packs in 25 grams of satisfying protein!
Get Recipe
Naked Nutrition 11
Mini Low Sugar Cheesecake
With only 6 ingredients and no oven required, this single serve cheesecake is perfect for when you're looking for something quick and easy.
Get Recipe
single serving keto cheesecake min
Strawberry Cappuccino Ice Cream
Calling all coffee lovers - this one's for you! With just three simple ingredients and one step it doesn't get much easier to make your own ice-cream.
Get Recipe
Strawberry Cappuccino Ice Cream PM1 e1651634197945
Oat Milk Hot Chocolate
This is a great dessert for a cozy winter night! It's dairy-free and vegan and is the perfect drink for any chocolate lover!
Get Recipe
hot chocolate with oat milk
Frozen Chocolate Bananas
Frozen chocolate bananas are an incredibly fun treat that will impress both kids and adults. They're easy to make, naturally sweet, and delicious.
Get Recipe
frozen chocolate bananas 12
Salted Caramel Protein Balls
Salted caramel protein balls make the perfect quick dessert. They're packed with plant-based protein to power your day. Plus, they're gluten-free, vegan, and have no added sugars!
Get Recipe
Salted Carmel Protein Bites Featured Image
Snickerdoodle Mug Cake
Want all of the cinnamon goodness from a snickerdoodle cookie baked up into a delicious single serve cake!? This simple yet delicious snickerdoodle mug cake won't disappoint!
Get Recipe
Snickerdoodle Mug Cake A Virtual Vegan HERO 1
Single Serve Chocolate Chip Cookie
Enjoy this warm, fresh-from-the-oven chocolate chip cookie without being tempted by a whole dozen! Throw some ice-cream on top and you've got a match made in heaven!
Get Recipe
Single Serving Deep Dish Chocolate Chip Cookie 2693
Pumpkin Chia Seed Pudding
This pumpkin chia seed pudding tastes like pumpkin pie in a jar and only requires 6 simple ingredients and 5 minutes of prep time!
Get Recipe
Pumpkin Chia Pudding
Chia Seed Jam
This chia seed jam is completely customizable and requires only two ingredients! Enjoy over dates or dark chocolate for a light dessert.
Get Recipe
Customizable Chia Jam 2 scaled
Vegan Chocolate Bark
This vegan chocolate bark is the perfect recipe for a lightly sweetened instant treat. Plus, there is no chocolate needed making this a quick and simple recipe to satisfy your sweet tooth!
Get Recipe
Quinoa Crunch Bark Square
Single Serve Banana Split
Craving dessert for breakfast? This high protein breakfast banana split features greek yogurt and delicious toasted coconut honey granola for a banana split like no other!
Get Recipe
breakfast banana split
S'mores Cake in a Jar
With a perfect graham cracker crust and a sweet chocolate and marshmallow center, this s'mores cake in a jar takes your classic campfire s'more to a whole new level!
Get Recipe
Smores Cake in a Jar Recipe
Pumpkin Spice "Nice Cream"
Calling all pumpkin-spice lovers! This refreshing, simple nice-cream recipe combines all the flavors of fall and is naturally sweetened with bananas and maple syrup for a healthy-spin on a classic fall treat!
Get Recipe
nice cream
Lemon Mug Cake
Looking for a bright and fresh new dessert? Treat your tastebuds to the citrusy-goodness of lemon with this fluffy lemon mug cake!
Get Recipe
lemon mug cake 2 683x1024 1
Baked Oats for One
This is the perfect cozy breakfast or dessert for one! Customize it with your favorite berries, nut butter, and any other toppings of your choice!
Get Recipe
Baked Oats for One Banzo Butter square 2
Enjoy cozy fall flavors in this delicious apple crumble parfait. Plus, it's easy to make and ready in 5 minutes or less!
Get Recipe
Healthy Apple Crumble Parfait 2 765x1148 1
Healthy Fruit Dip
Looking for a healthy but delicious afternoon snack or dessert? This fruit dip is a great way to make a fruit snack more satiating and nutritious with added fat and protein from the peanut butter.
Get Recipe
healthy fruit dip 12 of 12 1024x768 1
Dark Chocolate Avocado Truffles
These dark chocolate avocado truffles are completely customizable and call for just 3 ingredients. Plus, they're ready to go in just under 20 minutes with no baking involved!
Get Recipe
5ADE2180 C1AC 4D80 B6CD 599FC59349D4 1 105 c
Nutella Overnight Oats
This recipe puts a decadent twist on a go-to breakfast option. Overnight oats are super easy to make and can be prepped the night before for a hassle-free, delicious breakfast!
Get Recipe
Nutella Overnight Oats 4
Coconut Matcha Energy Bites
These coconut matcha energy bites are packed-full of nutritious ingredients like coconut, nut-butter, seeds, and matcha green tea powder to fuel your day!
Get Recipe
Coconut Matcha Energy Bites 2 scaled
Banana Parfait
Want layers upon layers of creamy and flavorful banana-goodness? Whip up this easy, no-bake, banana parfait that will impress your eyes and your taste buds!
Get Recipe
FAT BADGER BAKERY Banana Parfait Plant Based on a Budget 3
Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl
There's nothing better than a bowl filled with LOTS of PB. This single serving smoothie bowl is easy to whip up as a sweet treat.
Get Recipe
Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl 3 scaled
Greek Yogurt Cheesecakes
These mini greek yogurt cheesecakes are lightened up with greek yogurt and topped with fresh berries for a quick and easy sweet treat!
Get Recipe
greek yogurt cheesecake 4
Healthy Snickers Smoothie
Craving a snickers bar but want something more satiating and nutritious? Try this healthy, snickers-inspired smoothie that will satisfy both your hunger and your taste buds!
Get Recipe
Screen Shot 2022 05 03 at 9.49.11 PM
Strawberry Cheesecake Nice Cream
This recipe combines two delicious desserts into one! Plus, it's naturally sweetened with fruit and takes just minutes to prepare! Perfect for a refreshing dessert on a hot summer day!
Get Recipe
Strawberry Cheesecake
Personal Sized Peach Cobbler
Looking for a way to enjoy some sweet, summer peaches? Whip up this easy, personal-sized peach cobbler topped with a crunchy crust and a dash of cinnamon.
Get Recipe
easy peach cobbler
High Protein Cookie Dough
For those who prefer the dough over the cookies, this one's for you! Plus, this recipe stars nourishing ingredients like Medjool dates, protein powder, and add-ins of your choice.
Get Recipe
Protein Cookie Dough 7

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

save this single serve desserts guide on pinterest:

Healthy desserts for one - perfect for single serve - mini desserts
Corrin and Sydney

Guest Contributor Bio: Corrin and Sydney are both Registered-Dietitians-to-be from Westminster, Colorado who are passionate about helping others through food and nutrition. They are both currently Food Science and Human Nutrition majors at Colorado State University looking to graduate in 2023 and pursue their Masters in Dietetics. In their free time, Sydney and Corrin enjoy backpacking in the Colorado mountains, doing yoga, and cooking new recipes. They love sharing their passion for food with others and providing food inspiration on their Instagram page. You can connect with them on Instagram @nutri.liciouseats!

Date Apple Cookies

February 1, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

These Date Apple Cookies are the perfect way to satisfy your sweet tooth with a better-for-you treat. Plus, you get to customize with your choice of nut butter and apples!

Freshly baked cookies adorned with a caramel-like drizzle of date syrup and flaky sea salt, ready to be enjoyed.

(Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love these fluffy apple cookies
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you make apple cookies?
    • 1. Gather your ingredients
    • 2. Blend wet ingredients
    • 3. Combine with dry ingredients
    • 4. Scoop and press down
    • 4. Bake and top
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make these date apple cookies ahead of time?
  • Can I turn them into cookie bars?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • Want more? Try these other dietitian-approved cookie recipes:

    Why you'll love these fluffy apple cookies

    Whether you're meal prepping for the week, planning a picnic, or just looking for a wholesome treat, these cookies are sure to be a hit! Here's why you'll fall head over heels for them.

    • Natural sweetness: The combination of Medjool dates and apples gives these cookies a delightful, natural sweetness without the need for much added sugar.
    • Customizable: Whether you're a fan of different nut butters or apples, this recipe lets you choose your favorites.
    • Great for holidays: These cookies are perfect for Valentine's Day, a spontaneous baking afternoon, or to bring to a holiday party.
    Fluffy stacked apple date cookies

    Are these apple cookies healthy?

    These cookies contain a number of nourishing ingredients like dates, whole wheat flour, and apples.

    Dates are a fantastic source of fiber, vitamins, and minerals. They also provide natural sweetness, reducing the need for added sugars.

    Using whole wheat flour adds more fiber and nutrients compared to regular white flour, making these cookies a healthier choice.

    Finally, the star of the show: apples! Apples are not only delicious but also packed with vitamin C and important dietary fiber. Apples are rich in a specific type of fiber called soluble fiber, which research shows helps slow down the digestion process and promotes appetite-suppressing signals in the body. In turn, this leads to feeling fuller and more satisfied for longer. 

    Neatly prepared baking ingredients with vibrant chopped apples and rich Medjool dates set against a modern kitchen backdrop.

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Medjool Dates: There are all types of dates but I tend to love Medjool for their caramel-like sweetness. Find them in the produce of your grocery store.
    • Whole Wheat Flour: This flour adds a nutty flavor and boosts the fiber content. Look for it in the baking aisle.
    • Apples: Select firm, fresh apples for the best flavor and texture. We tend to use red apples over green for more sweetness.
    • Nut Butter: Opt for a natural, unsweetened version of your favorite nut butter. This adds a creamy texture and healthy fats.

    How do you make apple cookies?

    These cookies have a few different steps, but come together super quick.

    1. Gather your ingredients

    Preheat your oven to 350ºF and line your baking sheet with parchment paper or a silicone baking mat. Make sure you have all your wet and dry ingredients measured and ready to go, including the Medjool dates, maple syrup, your choice of nut butter, and chopped red apples.

    Blended wet ingredients in food processor

    2. Blend wet ingredients

    In a blender or food processor, blend the wet ingredients. This creates a rich, flavorful base for your cookies.

    Mixing apple cookies dough
    Dough in Kitchenaid

    3. Combine with dry ingredients

    Mix the wet and dry ingredients until just combined. You can either use a hand mixer or a stand mixer like a Kitchenaid. Gently fold in the diced apples and chopped dates to distribute them evenly throughout the batter.

    Scooping cookies onto pan
    Pressing cookies flat with hands

    4. Scoop and press down

    Using a cookie scoop or a tablespoon, scoop the batter onto your prepared baking sheet. Space the scoops about 2 inches apart to allow for spreading. Gently press down on each scoop with your hand or the back of a spoon to flatten them to about ½-inch thickness. This helps them bake evenly and gives them that classic cookie shape.

    Baking sheet full of date apple cookies, golden-brown and ready to enjoy, with a date syrup on the side
    Baking sheet full of date apple cookies, golden-brown and ready to enjoy, with a date syrup drizzled over

    4. Bake and top

    Keep an eye on the cookies, as oven temperatures can vary. Timing wise-8 minutes tends to give a softer cookie, 10 minutes for a soft-crunchy combo, and 12 minutes for a crunchier texture. After baking, allow the cookies to cool on the pan for a few minutes before transferring them to a wire rack to cool completely. For an extra touch of sweetness and elegance, drizzle over a generous amount of date syrup and sprinkle with flakey sea salt.

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair these cookies with a glass of almond milk or your favorite herbal tea for a cozy evening snack.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your dough is too sticky, you can chill it in the fridge for 30 minutes before shaping.
    • Scaling Tips: This recipe can easily be doubled. Just make sure to use a larger baking sheet or bake in batches.
    Date cookies lined on a cooling rack

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this Date Apple Cookie is completely customizable. You get to choose what type of apples and nut butter you want to use.

    • Apples of your choice: Experiment with different apple varieties for varying levels of sweetness and texture. This is a great recipe to use any that have been sitting in your fridge for a while.
    • Nut butter of your choice: Try almond, peanut, or cashew butter to change up the flavor profile. Make sure they're creamy for the best texture for the dough.

    Can I make these date apple cookies ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Simply prepare the dough in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 2 days. Then, you can scoop and bake when you're ready. Note: If you're cooking from the chilled dough, they may take a couple minutes longer to bake.

    A woman's hand with a pop of red nail polish holds cookies

    Can I turn them into cookie bars?

    Yes! If you want to make these apple cookies into apple cookie bars, simply add the batter into an 8x8-inch pan and bake for around 30-32 minutes until cooked through.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 4 days at room temperature. For longer storage, freeze them for up to a month.

    Date apple cookies stacked on a platter

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Date Apple Cookies16
    Print Recipe
    4.75 from 4 votes

    Date Apple Cookies

    These Apple Cookies are the perfect way to satisfy your sweet tooth with a better-for-you treat. Customize with your choice of nut butter and red apples.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time15 minutes mins
    Servings: 2 dozen small cookies
    Calories: 80kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Silicone baking mat
    • Pre-cut parchment paper sheets

    Ingredients

    Wet Ingredients:

    • 6 Medjool dates, pitted (about ⅔ cup)
    • ¼ cup maple syrup
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • ¼ cup nut butter of your choice (We tested this with either peanut butter or almond butter which work well. You could also experiment with cashew butter, sunflower seed butter, hazelnut butter, etc.)
    • 1 tablespoon coconut oil, melted in the microwave (then let cool for 1 minute in order to not cook the egg)

    Dry Ingredients:

    • 1 ½ cups (160 grams) whole wheat flour
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ¼ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ½ teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup red apples of your choice, peeled and chopped into ¼-inch pieces (Honeycrisp, Envy, SugarBee, Fuji, Gala, Pink Lady, or Braeburn etc.)
    • 2 Medjool dates, pitted and chopped into ¼-inch pieces

    Optional Toppings:

    • Date syrup
    • Flakey sea salt
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350º F. Line a half size (18"x13") baking sheet with parchment paper or a silicone baking mat.
    • In a blender or food processor, blend dates, maple syrup, egg, vanilla, nut butter, and coconut oil.
    • In a large bowl or stand mixer, combine flour, cinnamon, nutmeg, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Mix until combined. Then, gently stir in chopped apples and dates.
    • Add blended wet ingredients to the dry ingredients and mix until just combined.
    • Scoop out with cookie scoop (~1 tablespoon) and add to the prepared baking sheet. Gently press down with your hand to flatten to about ½-inch thickness. Repeat with remaining batter.
    • Bake cookies for 8-12 minutes then let cool on a rack.
    • If desired, drizzle over a generous amount of date syrup and flakey sea salt on top.
    • Store in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 4 days.

    Video

    Notes

    Cookie Baking Times: The recipe mentions baking for 8-12 minutes. 8 minutes will yield a soft texture with no crunch. In our opinion, 10 minutes is usually just right with a soft crunchy combo. Then, 12 minutes will be more of a fully crunchy cookie.
    Cookie Bars: If you want to make these into cookie bars, simply add the batter into 8”x8” pan and bake for ~30-32 minutes until cooked through.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 80kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g

    save this lower sugar apple cookies recipe on pinterest:

    Healthy apple cookies

    A big thanks to Cheerful Choices intern Claire for her help testing this cookie recipe!

    Want more? Try these other dietitian-approved cookie recipes:

    • Strawberry Protein Cookies
    • Trail Mix Cookies
    • Peanut Butter Oatmeal Cookies

    Buffalo Chicken Wraps with Veggies

    January 29, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    These Buffalo Chicken Wraps are ideal for those game day parties or a busy weeknight. This recipe is packed with a cheesy buffalo dip topped with veggies and rolled up in a tortilla. The best part? You get to customize these wraps with cheese and veggies of your choice!

    A close-up of a halved buffalo chicken wrap with a tangy, cheese-filled center, alongside a serving bowl of buffalo dip and raw veggies

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Are buffalo wraps healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make these buffalo chicken wraps?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I make it ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this buffalo wraps recipe on pinterest:
    • try these other game day recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    This recipe is sure to be a favorite for a number of reasons.

    • Flavorful: The perfect balance of spice from the buffalo sauce and coolness from the ranch and cheese.
    • Perfect for Parties: Ideal for those parties when you want to serve up something delicious but don't have much time.
    • Customizable: Choose your favorite veggies to add a fresh crunch.

    What are buffalo chicken wraps?

    Buffalo chicken wraps are a scrumptious twist on traditional game day fare. They combine fiery buffalo dip with the freshness of your favorite veggies, all wrapped in a tortilla. Serve these at your Super Bowl party or enjoy as a unique lunch or dinner.

    Hands holding a buffalo chicken wraps cut in half to show the creamy filling, with a bowl of buffalo dip surrounded by chips and carrot sticks in the background.

    Are buffalo wraps healthy?

    As a dietitian, I'm all about balance. Let's be honest: this recipe does include some high-calorie goodies like ranch dressing and cheese. However, it's important to be able to incorporate some of these rich ingredients into our diets without guilt. This builds sustainable eating patterns. Remember: life is about both enjoying our food and letting it nourish our bodies with nutrients.

    There are some simple ways we're making these wraps healthier though.

    • Opt for low-fat cream cheese for less fat and calories. 
    • In addition to the veggies in the wrap, feel free to have more veggies on the side.
    • Look for whole grain wraps for a bit extra fiber.

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Buffalo Sauce: The MVP of this recipe! Find your favorite brand and get ready for some heat. We love using Primal Kitchen's buffalo sauce.
    • Ranch Dressing: It cools down the spice and adds creaminess. Light versions work great too!
    • Cheese: Use your favorite cheese like sharp cheddar or pepper jack for some extra heat.
    • Cream Cheese: We're calling for Greek or low-fat cream cheese but you can also use whole fat versions.
    • Chicken: Shredded rotisserie chicken is our go-to for convenience and flavor. There's also pre-shredded chicken typically available in the deli department.
    • Tortillas: Perfect for wrapping up all that goodness. 
    • Veggies: Adds important color, vitamins, and minerals into the mix. 
    Buffalo dip on tortilla
    Veggies added on tortilla

    How do you make these buffalo chicken wraps?

    • Make buffalo dip: Combine all buffalo dip ingredients and cook until melted and thickened into a dip. This part alone is sooo good.
    • Add over fillings: Add buffalo dip to tortilla then top with veggies.
    • Roll and heat: Need help rolling wraps? View this guide before rolling. Then, you have the option to heat it up. We love doing this to get the tortilla crispy on the outside.
    Rolled tortilla
    Cooked buffalo wrap

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Try serving these wraps alongside similar dippers you'd have out for buffalo dip like celery, carrots, and pita chips.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: The dip may be thinner or thicker depending on the ingredients you use. If the texture is thinner, you may need to use less buffalo dip inside the tortilla to make it easier to wrap. You can also let the dip cool slightly to allow it to thicken up.
    • Scaling Tips: You can always scale this recipe down by cutting it in half if you only want to make 4 wraps.
    Spoonful of buffalo dip

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this buffalo chicken wrap is completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese and veggies you want to use.

    • Shredded cheese of your choice: Cheddar cheese is typically traditional to buffalo dip but you can customize with most of any cheese you prefer-just make sure to use shredded to it easily melts. Customize with Mozzarella, Monterey Jack, Pepper Jack, Gouda, or Colby.
    • Veggies of your choice: Mix it up depending on what you're craving or have on hand. Veggies like bell peppers, tomatoes, celery, carrots, zucchini, yellow squash, broccoli, corn, onions, mushrooms, lettuce, or a mixture all work great. If serving the wraps with lettuce, we'd recommend serving right away without cooking the tortilla so the lettuce doesn't wilt.
    Adding lettuce to buffalo wrap
    Buffalo wraps with lettuce

    Can I make it ahead of time?

    You bet! Whip up the buffalo dip beforehand and keep it in the fridge. On game day, just assemble, heat, and serve. You won't miss a minute of the action. 

    You can also fully prep the wraps and store in the fridge until ready to eat.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Got leftovers? No problem! Tuck them away in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. They're great for a post-game day snack.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Buffalo Dip Wraps 9
    Print Recipe
    Be the first to rate this recipe!

    Buffalo Chicken Wraps

    These Buffalo Chicken Wraps are ideal for those game day parties or a busy weeknight. Customize with cheese and veggies of your choice!
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time20 minutes mins
    Servings: 8 wraps
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    Buffalo Dip Ingredients:

    • 1 cup buffalo sauce
    • ½ cup ranch dressing
    • 1 cup shredded cheese of your choice (cheddar, mozzarella, monterey jack, pepper jack, gouda, or colby)
    • 1 package (8 ounces) Greek or low fat cream cheese, softened
    • 3 cups cooked and shredded chicken

    Wrap Ingredients:

    • 8 - 8 inch tortillas
    • 2 cups quick cooking vegetables of your choice, diced into ¼″ pieces (bell peppers, tomatoes, celery, carrots, zucchini, yellow squash, broccoli, corn, onions, mushrooms, lettuce or a mixture)
    • 4 cups buffalo dip (from recipe above)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    Buffalo Dip Instructions:

    • In a medium-size pot over medium heat, combine the buffalo sauce, ranch, shredded cheese, and cream cheese. Cook for 8 to 10 minutes, or until the mixture is smooth and the cream cheese is completely melted.
    • Stir in the shredded chicken and continue cooking for another 5 minutes, until heated through.

    Wrap Instructions:

    • Lay out a tortilla on a flat surface.
    • Spread ½ cup of the prepared buffalo dip evenly over the tortilla followed by ¼ cup veggies of your choice.
    • Roll the tortilla tightly, securing the contents inside.
    • Repeat with the remaining tortillas for a total of 8 wraps.
    • Optional: For a crispy tortilla, lightly coat a pan with cooking spray. Then, pan fry the rolled wraps on medium heat for 3-4 minutes per side.
    • Store any leftover wraps in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    save this buffalo wraps recipe on pinterest:

    Buffalo chicken wraps for game day

    try these other game day recipes too:

    • Customizable Snack Board
    • Jalapeno or Mini Pepper Poppers
    • Maple Soy Glazed Walnuts

    Customizable Quick Pickled Red Onions

    January 25, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    These quick pickled red onions recipe is perfect for adding a zesty kick to your meals. Featuring a blend of red onions (diced or sliced) and apple cider vinegar. They're customizable too-use any sweetener of your choice like honey or a sugar substitute!

    Top view of a jar filled with diced pickled red onions, with a spoonful beside it and a half-sliced red onion

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Are pickled onions healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How to cut red onions?
    • How to make quick pickled red onions
    • Using quick pickled red onions
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make these pickled onions ahead of time?
    • How long can I store pickled onions?
    • Can you pickle white onions?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this easy pickled red onion recipe on pinterest:

    Why you'll love it

    At first glance, pickled onions might seem like just another condiment, but oh, how they transform a dish! Think: sweet + tangy! Their vibrant color and tangy flavor can really turn an ordinary meal into extraordinary.

    Whether it's jazzing up a simple sandwich or salad, these pickled onions always add amazing flavor. 

    Quick pickled onions vs traditional pickled onions

    Both methods can really shine, but in our opinion-quick pickled onions make the most sense for those with a busy schedule. Let's talk about the main differences.

    • Time and Taste: The biggest difference lies in the time they take to pickle and the taste. Our quick pickled onions can be prepped in a matter of minutes and are ready overnight. They have a bright, tangy flavor. Traditional pickled onions, on the other hand, require several weeks to mature and have a more mellow taste.
    • Prep Method: Quick pickling involves a simple mix of vinegar, water, and flavorings heated together. Traditional pickling can include fermentation or a more complex canning process. Here's a guide to traditional pickling!

    Are pickled onions healthy?

    Onions are packed with antioxidants and compounds like "quercetin" (a plant pigment and flavonoid) that research shows may help reduce inflammation.

    Apple cider vinegar (ACV) is also a popular kitchen staple. It can be used in salad dressings, smoothies, and soups. Some research shows a modest amount of ACV may help improve fasting blood sugar levels and HbA1c levels in individuals with diabetes. But honestly, research is pretty limited here to fully support these potential benefits.

    Ingredients on white counter

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Red Onion: These bulbs are best when fresh and firm. You can find them in the produce section. You can use either 1 full small red onion or half of a large one.
    • Apple Cider Vinegar: Aim to purchase one with "the mother" which will have a weird looking cloudy substance in the bottle. Don't worry - this indicates beneficial bacteria at work, which is great for gut health.
    • Sweetener of Your Choice: Whether it's traditional sugar or a better-for-you alternative like monk fruit or honey, each brings a unique touch and flavor.
    Chopping onion in veggie chopper
    Chopping onion in veggie chopper

    How to cut red onions?

    For this recipe you can either dice or slice onions. We prefer using our veggie chopper and dicing them in small pieces.

    If you are chopping them yourself, here's how to do it. It may be helpful to watch this video on how to cut them too.

    • Slice: First, you're going to cut the onion in half. Then, place the onion half face down and chop off both ends of the onion - the root and the top. Next up, peel off that outer layer. Then, make thin, even slices along the onion ridges to create half moon slices.
    • Dice: First, you're going to cut the onion in half. Then, place the onion half face down and cut off just one end of the onion this time. Peel off the outer layer. Make vertical slices down the ridges, but here's the key - don't slice all the way through the root end; it holds everything together. Then, turn your knife to make opposite cuts down toward the root. Voila! You've got beautifully diced onion.

    Need more hands-on help with your knife skills? In our "Coaching + Cooking" program, we teach these foundational skills 1:1!

    Diced red onions in jar
    Diced red onions in jar covered in brine

    How to make quick pickled red onions

    1. Prep: Start by dicing or slicing the onion. Follow the instructions above if you need help.
    2. Mix and Heat: Combine the water, vinegar, salt, peppercorns, and sweetener. Heat this mixture until everything dissolves. You can do this on the stove but we prefer microwaving to save time.
    3. Jar It Up: Place the onions in a mason jar and pour over the hot vinegar mix, ensuring the onions are fully submerged for even pickling.
    4. Cool and Store: Let it cool to room temperature, then add over the jar lid and refrigerate. Overnight you'll start to see the liquid color change and the flavors will infuse.

    Using quick pickled red onions

    I always like to keep pickled red onions in the fridge for an instant flavor booster. Here's some ways to use them:

    • Customizable nachos
    • Caesar salads 
    • Avocado egg toast
    • Tofu tacos
    • Veggie burgers
    • Roast beef sliders 
    • Charcuterie board spread
    • Air fryer tortilla pizzas
    A mason jar showcasing vibrant pickled red onions diced into small pieces, with a copper spoon and a raw red onion

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your onions aren't fully submerged, add a bit more water. The key is to keep them covered in the pickling liquid.
    • Scaling Tips: This recipe is super scalable. Feel free to double the ingredients-this should also fit fine in a 16-ounce wide-mouth mason jar.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this pickled onion is completely customizable. You get to choose what sweetener ingredients you want to use. 

    Sweetener of your choice: Feel free to use a traditional granulated option or a liquid sweetener. Options like honey or maple syrup add a unique flavor, while sugar alternatives keep it lower calorie and lower sugar.

    Homemade quick pickled red onions in a glass jar with tan lid

    Can you make these pickled onions ahead of time?

    Absolutely! In fact, pickled onions should ideally sit for about 30 minutes or longer before they're ready to eat. Feel free to make them a few days in advance, and watch how their flavor and color evolves.

    How long can I store pickled onions?

    You can store quick pickled red onions in the jar for up to a month in the fridge. I like to label and date when I made them so I know when it's time to finish them up or toss them.

    After a month, the texture will usually be much softer and not as desirable. If you notice any type of off smell or mold growing, be sure to discard the pickled onions.

    Red onions before and after sitting

    Can you pickle white onions?

    Absolutely! White onions can be pickled using the same method. They offer a sharper, less sweet flavor. Just know, they won't have that beautiful pink hue like the pickled red onions.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Quick Pickled Red Onions 7
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Quick Pickled Red Onions

    This quick pickled red onion recipe is perfect for adding a zesty kick to your meals. Customizable too-use any sweetener of your choice like honey or a sugar substitute!
    Prep Time7 minutes mins
    Cook Time3 minutes mins
    Servings: 1 cup
    Calories: 20kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • 2-cup glass liquid measuring cup
    • 16 ounce wide-mouth mason jar (shown in the photos)

    Ingredients

    • 1 small red onion or ½ large red onion, diced or sliced (yields about 1 cup)
    • ½ cup water
    • ½ cup apple cider vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon whole peppercorns
    • 1 tablespoon sweetener of your choice (white sugar, monk fruit, honey, maple syrup, sugar alternative)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Prep your red onion by either dicing or slicing, depending on your preference.
    • In a 2-cup glass liquid measuring cup, mix together water, apple cider vinegar, salt, peppercorns, and sweetener.
    • Heat the mixture in the microwave on high for about 2-3 minutes or until it starts to simmer and the sweetener and salt dissolve. Be careful when removing the bowl from the microwave as it will be hot.
    • Place the onions in a 16 ounce wide-mouth mason jar. Carefully pour the hot vinegar mixture over the onions, ensuring they are completely submerged. You can gently press the onions down if necessary.
    • Allow the mixture to cool to room temperature. Once cooled, seal the jar with its lid.
    • Store the pickled onions in the refrigerator and let sit for at least 30 minutes before eating. Store extras in the fridge for up to 1 month.

    Notes

    Cutting Onions: New to cutting onions? Read this guide OR watch this video to dicing or slicing your onions. This is also a skill I teach in my Coaching + Cooking program that's 1:1 with myself, a culinary dietitian!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8servings | Calories: 20kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g

    save this easy pickled red onion recipe on pinterest:

    Quick pickled red onions top view

    Customizable Microwave Kale Chips

    January 18, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

    These 3-minute microwave kale chips are a game-changer for anyone looking for a quick, healthy snack. It's also a fantastic way to use up any extra kale that might otherwise go to waste. Plus, you get to customize with your favorite seasonings and oils. Get ready to make a crispy, healthy snack!

    Holding kale chip

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love these microwave kale chips
    • Are kale chips healthy?
    • Ingredients you'll need
    • How to make microwave kale chips
      • 1. Trick to remove the kale stem
      • 2. Tear into pieces
      • 3. Add to a plate
      • 4. Add oil and seasonings
      • 5. Microwave
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • What to do with the kale stems
    • How many kale chips does this recipe make?
    • What should I use kale chips for?
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make kale chips ahead of time?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this microwave kale chips recipe on pinterest:
    • Try these other kale recipes too:

    This post was first published on April 3, 2019. It was updated on January 18, 2024 with more helpful cooking notes and photos.

    Holding up bagel seasoning kale chip

    Why you'll love these microwave kale chips

    • Quick and Easy: Ready in just 3 minutes, these kale chips are perfect for a fast, healthy snack.
    • Customizable: Flavor these chips with seasonings of your choice. From olive oil and sea salt to unique seasonings, the possibilities are endless.
    • Healthy Snack Option: Kale is packed with nutrients, making these chips a guilt-free snack.

    Are kale chips healthy?

    Absolutely! Kale is a superfood, rich in vitamins A, K, and C, alongside other nutrients and antioxidants. Kale can often go to waste in the back of the fridge, especially if you're not feeling inspired with recipes. When you opt for this quick microwave method, you get a crispy kale chip you'll be craving on repeat.

    How to make microwavable kale chips

    Ingredients you'll need

    • Kale: The star of the show, kale provides a nutrient-rich base for these chips.
    • Oil: A drizzle of oil helps the kale crisp up in the microwave. You can experiment with different oils for varied flavors.
    • Seasonings: From classic salt and pepper to creative combinations like parmesan or sesame seeds, choose your favorite flavors to enhance these chips.

    How to make microwave kale chips

    Forgot waiting by the oven to make kale chips, easily make them in your microwave in 3 minutes or less. Here's how.

    1. Trick to remove the kale stem

    Start by washing the kale leaf and removing the thick stem down the center. You can cut it out with a knife or easily rip it out with your hands. To remove it with you hands, you can make an 'O' shape with your fingers, encircle the stem with your fingers, and then gently pull up from the bottom to top, stripping it off the stem.

    Hands tearing kale leaves
    Microwave Kale Chips 2

    2. Tear into pieces

    Then cut or tear the kale into bite-sized pieces. Typically around 2"x2" is a good size.

    Microwave Kale Chips 3
    Microwave Kale Chips 4

    3. Add to a plate

    Grab a microwave safe plate and evenly spread out your kale chips. Don't let them overlap. If you have extra, work in batches.

    Kale chips on plate

    4. Add oil and seasonings

    Add flavor additions of your choice, like avocado oil and bagel seasoning (as shown in the photos).

    Kale chips on plate with seasonings

    5. Microwave

    Microwave until the kale gets nice and crispy. Be sure to check on it and use your hands to feel if it's crispy or not. You should essentially be able to pick it up and have it not flop over at all.

    Kale chips added to microwave

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Make sure the kale is completely dry before adding oil and seasonings, as excess moisture can lead to uneven cooking.
    • The kale chips generally shouldn't stick to the plate since they have oil on them. However, for easier clean up you can place a sheet of microwave-safe parchment paper on the plate before adding the kale chips. Definitely avoid materials like wax paper or aluminum foil which can catch fire in a microwave.
    • Avoiding overcrowding the plate with kale to ensure even cooking.
    • Microwave in short intervals and keep your eye on the kale to assess its crispiness.
    • If your kale isn't crispy enough, microwave for an additional 30 seconds.

    What to do with the kale stems

    Kale stems are typically discarded but they're actually edible and you can use them in various recipes. Try grilling kale stems, chopped and adding to a stir fry, or blending into a morning juice. If you are are going to toss them, consider adding them to your compost bin.

    What to do with the kale stems

    How many kale chips does this recipe make?

    This recipe makes about 8 kale chips per large kale leaf. Definitely feel free to repeat with multiple kale leaves to use up the whole bunch! Just make sure to microwave in batches to avoid overcrowding the plate.

    What should I use kale chips for?

    These kale chips are great added to salads or enjoyed as a savory snack. Since they're ultra crunchy, they can also be crushed and used as a crunchy topping for soups or pasta.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my recipes, these 3-minute microwave kale chips are completely customizable. You get to choose oil and seasonings of your choice. You can even use a mixture to fill up the ~1 teaspoon seasonings of your choice. Here are some delicious variations to try:

    • Everything Bagel: Avocado oil, bagel seasoning
    • Asian Sesame Kale Chips: Garlic olive oil, soy sauce, sesame seeds
    • Cheesin' Kale Chips: Parmesan cheese or nutritional yeast, olive oil, sea salt
    • Popcorn Kale Chips: Butter olive oil, butter seasoning
    • Maple Balsamic Kale Chips: Red wine vinegar, olive oil, dijon mustard, maple syrup, balsamic vinegar, salt
    Microwave kale chips

    Can you make kale chips ahead of time?

    Kale chips should ideally be eaten right away to maintain their crispiness. If you need to store extras, you can put them in an airtight container at room temperature. Be aware that they will likely lose some of their crunch and freshness the next day.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Microwave Kale Chips 10
    Print Recipe
    5 from 6 votes

    3 Minute Microwave Kale Chips

    These microwave kale chips are a game-changer for anyone looking for a quick, healthy snack. It's also a great way to use up any extra kale on hand. Customize with oil and seasonings of your choice!
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Cook Time3 minutes mins
    Total Time3 minutes mins
    Course: Snack
    Servings: 8 chips
    Calories: 50kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 1 large curly kale leaf
    • 1 teaspoon oil of your choice (olive oil, avocado oil, etc.)
    • 1 teaspoon seasonings of your choice (Bagel seasoning, Italian seasoning, parmesan cheese, nutritional yeast, etc. See above for more ideas.)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Wash kale leaf and dry thoroughly. Rip into 8 medium-sized pieces.
    • Toss kale with oil and seasonings of your choice.
    • Arrange the kale pieces in a single layer on the plate.
    • Microwave kale chips for 2 minutes to start. Use hands to pick up kale leaf and see if it's crispy. If kale chips aren't crispy after the 2 minute mark, microwave in 30 seconds intervals until crispy.
    • Repeat as desired with multiple kale leaves.
    • Enjoy immediately as they lose their crispiness with time.

    Video

    Notes

    Kale Note: This recipe calls for curly kale - this is the most common type of kale you'll see in the store. I have not tested this recipe with lacinato kale, but I assume since it's a flatter kale it would not work very well.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8kale chips | Calories: 50kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Fiber: 1g

    save this microwave kale chips recipe on pinterest:

    Crispy Microwave kale chips

    Try these other kale recipes too:

    • Massaged Kale Salad with Apples
    • Tuscan Farro Soup
    • Chocolate Smoothie made with Kale

    Caramelized Banana Overnight Oats

    January 17, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    There's something incredibly comforting about waking up to a ready-to-go breakfast, especially when it's as delightful as Caramelized Banana Overnight Oats. It's seriously as easy as: prep, grab, and go - perfect for busy mornings. Plus you get to customize with milk, yogurt, and sweetener of your choice.

    Hand holding a jar of banana overnight oats topped with walnuts

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make these banana overnight oats?
    • Can I use ripe bananas?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make caramelized banana overnight oats ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • try these recipes too:
    • Try these other banana recipes too:

    Why you'll love it

    Overnight oats are so simple and convenient. Just mix, set in the fridge overnight, and you'll wake up to a creamy, delicious bowl ready to eat! They are truly a meal prep dream.

    Breakfast jar of banana-flavored overnight oats with a walnut crunch

    Are overnight oats healthy?

    This overnight oats recipe is healthy for a number of reasons. Oats are known for their fiber-rich content, particularly beta-glucan, which can help lower cholesterol and improve heart health.

    The bananas offer natural sweetness. This means even though they provide naturally occuring sugar-there's no added sugars. One medium banana provides just over 100 calories, 3 grams of fiber, and 442 mg of potassium (this is 9% the daily value).

    Oats and bananas are both carbohydrates sources that give us energy. Then, when you combine these with the protein from Greek yogurt and the nourishing omega-3s fat from chia seeds, this breakfast easily becomes a balanced start to your day.

    Ingredients on a kitchen counter

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Rolled Oats: These are whole oats that have been flattened and steamed. They offer a chewy yet creamy texture after sitting overnight.
    • Milk: Choose any milk that fits your dietary preferences. 
    • Greek Yogurt: Adds creaminess and a good amount of protein.
    • Chia Seeds: These tiny seeds are packed with omega-3 fatty acids, fiber, and antioxidants.
    • Bananas: You can use either under ripe or ripe bananas - we prefer slightly ripe bananas for a sweeter flavor and soft texture.
    • Coconut Sugar: This sugar is made by extracting the sap of the coconut palm tree, which is then heated and dried to produce a granulated form that is similar in texture to brown sugar. It also retains small amounts of nutrients found in the coconut palm.
    • Cinnamon: Adds a warm, sweet spice that goes great with banana. Cinnamon is known for its healthy antioxidant properties.

    How do you make these banana overnight oats?

    1. Prepare the Oats Base: In a mason jar, combine rolled oats, milk, Greek yogurt, chia seeds, sweetener, vanilla extract, and cinnamon.
    2. Let it Rest Overnight: Stir the mixture well and let it sit in the fridge overnight or at least 2 hours.
    3. Caramelize the Bananas: You can do this step either the night before or morning of. Toss banana slices in coconut sugar and cinnamon, then cook them in a skillet with oil until golden.
    4. Assemble and Enjoy: Add the caramelized bananas over the oats and top with your choice of toppings.
    Overnight oats base
    Oats topped with caramelized bananas

    Can I use ripe bananas?

    Along with recipes like collagen banana bread and cheesecake "nice" cream, this recipe is a great way to use up ripe bananas. In this recipe, ripe bananas are naturally sweeter and tend to become soft and compote-like in texture when cooked, perfect for those who enjoy a richer sweetness and softer consistency in their oats.

    On the other hand, if you use unripe bananas they will be less sweet and maintain their shape better when heated, offering a firmer texture to your breakfast. 

    Banana Oats 1

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair these oats with a cup of coffee or herbal tea for a cozy breakfast.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If the oats mixture is too thick in the morning, adjust the consistency by adding a little more milk.
    • Scaling Tips: This recipe can be easily doubled or tripled. Just make sure you have enough jars to store the oats. You can also combine it all together in a large bowl and portion into a bowl out each morning.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of our other recipes, this Caramelized Banana Overnight Oats is completely customizable. You get to choose what milk, yogurt, and sweetener you want to use.

    • Milk of your choice: Whether it's almond, soy, cow's, or oat milk, pick one that suits your taste and dietary preferences.
    • Yogurt of your choice: We always like to choose Greek yogurt for extra creaminess and protein. You can also sub a plant-based yogurt like almond or coconut for a dairy-free alternative.
    • Liquid sweetener of your choice: Go with classic honey, maple syrup for a rich flavor, agave for a vegan option, or date syrup for a no added sugar option. Whatever you choose - you can't go wrong!
    Taking spoonful of creamy overnight oats with banana slices and walnut topping

    Can you make caramelized banana overnight oats ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Overnight oats are meant to be prepared ahead of time, making your morning routine quicker. 

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store any prepped oats in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge. Note: The bananas will start to get softer as they sit.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Banana Oats 6
    Print Recipe
    Be the first to rate this recipe!

    Caramelized Banana Overnight Oats

    These banana overnight oats are perfect to prep ahead of time. Customize with milk, yogurt, and sweetener of your choice.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time10 minutes mins
    Course: Breakfast
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: overnight oats
    Servings: 2 servings
    Calories: 560kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • 16 ounce mason jar
    • 8 ounce mason jar

    Ingredients

    Oat Base:

    • 1 cup rolled oats
    • ⅔ cup milk of your choice (cow's milk, almond, soy, oat, rice, coconut, cashew, hemp, flax, macadamia milk, etc.)
    • ½ cup Greek yogurt of your choice (plain, vanilla, chocolate, etc.)
    • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
    • 2 teaspoons liquid sweetener of your choice (maple syrup, honey, agave syrup, date syrup, etc.)
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

    Caramelized Bananas:

    • 2 medium bananas, sliced
    • 3 teaspoons coconut sugar
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • 2 teaspoons coconut oil

    Optional Toppings:

    • 2 tablespoons chopped walnuts
    • 2 tablespoons peanut butter
    • Sprinkle of cinnamon
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • In a 16 ounce mason jar or two 8 ounce jars, combine all the ingredients for the oats base. Stir everything together until it's all combined.
    • Place the jar(s) in the refrigerator and let the mixture sit overnight (or for at least 2 hours) to allow the oats to thicken and soften.
    • Either the night before or in the morning, prepare the caramelized bananas. To do so, toss sliced bananas with coconut sugar and cinnamon in a bowl.
    • Heat coconut oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Once the oil is hot, add the bananas in a single layer. Let the bananas cook for about 4 minutes on one side until they start to turn golden brown. Then, carefully flip and cook for another 4 minutes.
    • Spoon the caramelized bananas on top of the oats. Then, top with walnuts, peanut butter, and cinnamon, if desired.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving (with toppings) | Calories: 560kcal | Carbohydrates: 75g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 90mg | Potassium: 870mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 12g | Calcium: 290mg | Iron: 3.5mg

    save this banana oats recipe on pinterest:

    Caramelized banana oats in a meal prep mason jar

    Try these other banana recipes too:

    • Apple Banana Smoothie
    • High Protein Banana Bread
    • Protein Mug Cake
    • Banana Oatmeal Chocolate Chip Muffins

    Italian Meatloaf

    January 15, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

    This Italian Meatloaf is a delicious twist on the classic meatloaf, allowing you to choose any protein of your choice. This means you get to customize with either beef, turkey, chicken, bison, or a plant-based alternative.

    Large slices of meatloaf next to spatula

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • What is the best type of meat for meatloaf?
    • Is meatloaf healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make Italian meatloaf?
      • 1. Mix the ingredients
      • 2. Add to pan
      • 3. Top with cheese and bake.
      • 4. Let it rest
      • 5. Slice and serve
    • What should I serve with meatloaf?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Making this Italian meatloaf recipe ahead of time
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this Italian meatloaf recipe on pinterest:
      • Try these other recipes for a crowd too:

    Why you'll love it

    If you're a meatloaf fan, you're in for a treat with this Italian-inspired version.

    The combination of Italian seasoning, mozzarella, and marinara sauce is bursting with flavor. It's a crowd pleaser because YOU have the flexibility to choose your preferred protein. This means it can suit various dietary and taste preferences-just what Cheerful Choices is all about.

    You'll love this recipe too because it's balanced in protein, carbs, and fat-making for a nourishing weeknight dinner.

    Italian meatloaf on serving pan

    Italian style meatloaf vs regular meatloaf

    What sets Italian Meatloaf apart from the regular version? It all comes down to the flavors and ingredients. In place of the typical meatloaf seasonings like Worcestershire sauce and mustard, for this Italian Meatloaf we're using an Italian seasoning blend. It also features a combo of mozzarella and Parmesan cheese, adding a deliciously cheesy twist. Finally, it's topped with a rich marinara sauce, a flavorful alternative to the classic ketchup topping.

    Ground beef rolls
    Ground beef added to white bowl

    What is the best type of meat for meatloaf?

    The best meat for Italian Meatloaf depends on your preferences and dietary needs. Here's some to consider:

    • Ground beef - traditional meatloaf often uses ground beef for its rich, classic flavor.
    • Ground pork - imparts a tender and juicy texture.
    • Ground turkey or chicken - leaner options that provide less saturated fat but may be slightly less juicy.
    • Ground bison - offers a unique taste with a sweet undertone.
    • Plant-based alternatives - are perfect for vegetarians, those trying to cut back their meat intake, or for a Meatless Monday dish. One of my favorite plant-based proteins to use is Beyond Beef made with pea protein! You can't even tell it's not meat.
    • Or a mixture - feel free to mix and match 1 pound of one meat type with 1 pound of another. We've tested this before with a blend of 1 pound of 97% lean ground beef and 1 pound of ground pork and it's delish!

    Is meatloaf healthy?

    Absolutely! As a dietitian, meatloaf is a staple recipe in our home. Our Italian Meatloaf really packs a nutritious punch. It's a high-protein dish which is beneficial for muscles and overall health.

    Plus, the addition of garlic and onions provide antioxidants which can help lower inflammation. 

    Remember, balance is key in a healthy diet. This meatloaf, when paired with a side of vegetables, definitely makes for a well-rounded meal.

    All Italian meatloaf ingredients on white backdrop

    What ingredients do you need?

    Here is what you'll need to make this Italian style meatloaf.

    • Protein of your choice: Beef, pork, turkey, chicken, bison, or plant-based ground like Beyond Beef.
    • Breadcrumbs: These provide texture and help bind the meatloaf.
    • Parmesan Cheese: Adds a savory kick to the dish.
    • Garlic: Minced garlic cloves for flavor.
    • Onion: Finely chopped onion for added depth.
    • Eggs: To bind everything together.
    • Marinara Sauce: Tomato-based sauce that infuses flavor. We've also experimented using vodka sauce in place of marinara sauce and it's yummy too!
    • Italian Seasoning: A blend of aromatic herbs for that Italian touch.
    • Salt and Pepper: For seasoning.
    • Mozzarella Cheese: Shredded mozzarella for the delicious melted cheese topping.
    Italian Meatloaf topped with melted mozzarella cheese in a white baking dish

    How do you make Italian meatloaf?

    You only need a couple utensils and tools to make this meatloaf.

    1. Mix the ingredients

    Combine your chosen protein, breadcrumbs, Parmesan cheese, minced garlic, chopped onion, eggs, marinara sauce, Italian seasoning, salt, and black pepper in a large mixing bowl. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

    Mixing ingredients together in bowl for meatloaf
    Meatloaf stirred together

    2. Add to pan

    Transfer the meatloaf mixture to a prepared pan and top it with marinara sauce. If you don't have the right pan, you can also use your hands to shape it into a mound.

    Meatloaf process
    Meatloaf process with marinara on top

    3. Top with cheese and bake.

    Finish it off with a layer of shredded mozzarella cheese. Then, pop it in the oven at 350°F and let it cook for about 50-60 minutes or until it reaches an internal temperature of 160°F.

    Mozzarella cheese on top of pan

    4. Let it rest

    This step is crucial. Normally, you cook ground meat to 165ºF but since it's resting for 15-20 minutes, it's safe to remove it at 160°F and let it rest to finish coming to temperature. This helps the juices redistribute, making each slice moist and flavorful.

    Baked Italian Meatloaf with a gooey cheese crust, ready to be sliced and served

    5. Slice and serve

    After resting, use a sharp knife to cut into 6 large slices or 12 smaller half slices. One half slice is considered a serving when looking at the nutrition facts for this recipe. Once cooked, serve with your favorite sides.

    What should I serve with meatloaf?

    Italian Meatloaf pairs wonderfully with mashed potatoes, roasted vegetables, or a lemon arugula salad. Don't forget to drizzle extra marinara sauce on top of the meatloaf for a burst of flavor.

    Golden-brown cheesy Italian Meatloaf fresh out of the oven, served alongside green asparagus

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Troubleshooting Tips: To avoid a dry meatloaf, ensure you don't overcook it. You can use a probe meat thermometer to check for doneness if you have one.
    • Scaling Tips: This meatloaf makes double the amount of most meatloaf recipes, so it can definitely serve a crowd. However, if you need more servings, you can double the recipe and use 2 - 7"x11" (2 quart) pans.
    • Save Time: Don't feel like chopping the veggies by hand? Place the onion, carrot, celery, and garlic in a food processor fitted with the steel blade and pulse until the vegetables are minced. 

    Customize it your way

    Like all of our other recipes, this Italian Meatloaf is completely customizable. You get to choose your preferred protein, making it suitable for meat lovers, vegetarians, or anyone in between. 

    • Protein of your choice - Feel free to choose ground beef, turkey, chicken, bison, or plant-based ground like Beyond.
    • Cheese - This recipe calls for both parmesan and mozzarella. If you are vegan, you can substitute for vegan alternatives.
    • Breadcrumbs - If you need this meatloaf to be gluten-free, swap the regular breadcrumbs for gluten-free breadcrumbs.
    Hearty Italian Meatloaf in a ceramic dish, perfect for a comforting family meal.

    Making this Italian meatloaf recipe ahead of time

    You can prepare this Italian meatloaf ahead of time and just don't bake it yet. Refrigerate it until you are ready to bake. 

    Meatloaf is a great option for meal prep too. You can slice and distribute cooked meatloaf slices among meal prep containers to enjoy throughout the week.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store any leftover meatloaf in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. For longer storage, freeze it for up to 3 months. To reheat, microwave for 1-2 minutes until warm.

    Savory Italian-style meatloaf with a bubbly cheese topping, accompanied by mashed potatoes and green beans

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Italian Meatloaf 18
    Print Recipe
    5 from 4 votes

    Italian Meatloaf

    Italian Meatloaf is a delicious twist on the classic. Plus, you get to customize with beef, turkey, pork, chicken, bison, or a plant-based alternative.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time1 hour hr
    Rest Time10 minutes mins
    Total Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: holiday, meal prep
    Servings: 12 slices (~2x3 inches wide each)
    Calories: 250kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish

    Ingredients

    • Cooking spray
    • 2 pounds (32 ounces) ground protein of your choice (lean ground beef, ground pork, ground turkey, ground chicken, ground bison, or plant-based ground)
    • 1 cup breadcrumbs (sub GF breadcrumbs if gluten-free)
    • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese
    • 1 tablespoon minced garlic, about 3 cloves
    • 1 small onion, finely chopped (about ½ cup)
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 ½ cups marinara sauce or vodka sauce, divided
    • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 cup shredded mozzarella cheese
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Spray a 7"x11" (2 quart) pan with a generous amount of cooking spray.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the ground protein, breadcrumbs, Parmesan cheese, garlic, onion, eggs, 1 cup of the marinara sauce, Italian seasoning, salt, and black pepper. Mix well until all the ingredients are combined evenly.
    • Transfer the meatloaf mixture to the loaf pan and top with remaining ½ cup of marinara sauce followed by the mozzarella cheese.
    • Bake meatloaf uncovered for about 50-60 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 160°F (70°C).
    • Remove the meatloaf from the oven and let it rest for 10 minutes before slicing. Slice and serve with your favorite side dishes.

    Video

    Notes

    Resting Note: As this will be resting for 15-20 minutes after taking it from the oven, it is safe to remove at 160°F and let it rest to finish coming to temperature. This helps the juices redistribute, making the meatloaf juicier.
    Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for 97% lean ground beef. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 460mg | Potassium: 400mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 2g | Calcium: 200mg | Iron: 3mg

    save this Italian meatloaf recipe on pinterest:

    Slice of meatloaf next to blistered green beans and mashed potatoes

    Try these other recipes for a crowd too:

    • Bejeweled Rice
    • Deconstructed Chicken Pot Pie
    • Sausage & Green Beans Sheet Pan Meal

    Protein Cookie Dough

    January 12, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

    Craving a sweet yet healthy dessert? This Protein Cookie Dough recipe is perfect for you! It's packed with natural sweetness from Medjool dates and packs a protein punch with your choice of protein powder. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite add-ins like chocolate chips or nuts.

    A gold spoonful of chocolate chip protein cookie dough

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Natural Delights. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Are medjool dates healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need for protein powder cookie dough?
    • How do you make this edible protein cookie dough?
    • Can I make it without a food processor?
    • Can I make my own oat flour?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make this protein dough ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Could I bake this cookie dough if I wanted to?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this protein cookie dough recipe on pinterest:
      • Want more? Try these other recipes made with protein powder:

    Why you'll love it

    Let's be honest… who didn't love sneaking cookie dough as a kid? Unfortunately, it can be unsafe due to the raw eggs and uncooked flour.

    Instead, this edible version uses ingredients that are safe to eat without cooking! It's also…

    • Nutrient-Rich: Each scoop of this cookie dough is filled with wholesome ingredients like Medjool dates and oat flour, providing essential nutrients in every bite.
    • Customizable: Love nuts? More of a chocolate fan? This recipe is all about making it your own with your choice of add-ins.
    • No-Bake Ease: Forget the oven; this recipe is as simple as mixing and chilling. Perfect for your busy schedule!
    A hand picking up a scoop of no-bake protein cookie dough with chocolate chips

    Is protein cookie dough healthy?

    This cookie dough is unique because it uses protein powder to add a significant protein boost. As a dietitian, I'm always talking about the importance of protein in my "Coaching + Cooking" program. Protein is important for satiety, muscle repair, and supporting our immune system. By choosing a high-quality protein powder, like your favorite whey or plant-based option, you're adding a nutritious element to this treat.

    It also uses a base of Medjool dates and oat flour-both filled with fiber and important nutrients.

    Rolled protein dough bites, a portable and healthy snack option, made with Medjool dates

    Are medjool dates healthy?

    Medjool dates have started to become more popular, especially with viral recipes in the spotlight like Date "Snickers" and date barks with tasty flavor combos like Chocolate Peppermint and Coconut Almond! Many people don't know this but Medjool dates are actually considered a fresh fruit, not a dried fruit. They have a caramel-like taste, making them perfect to satisfy any sweet tooth. Since they're a fruit, all their sugars are naturally occurring, meaning there are no added sugars. They're also a source of potassium, iron, and satiating fiber.

    When it comes to picking out Medjool dates, we always like to buy a pack of Natural Delight Medjool dates online or at my local grocery store. We're using Medjool dates for this recipe because they tend to have a sweeter and softer texture that easily breaks down into a dough consistency. 

    In October 2022, I was actually able to help harvest dates and see the full process they go through to reach our grocery shelves! Did you know each date palm tree produces around 200-250 pounds of dates? SO. COOL.

    Bowl of Medjool dates
    Mackenzie Burgess in front of Medjool date palms

    What ingredients do you need for protein powder cookie dough?

    • Medjool Dates: These naturally sweet fruits are the perfect base for our cookie dough. Look for them in the fresh produce section of your grocery store, often placed on a display shelf nearby.
    • Protein Powder: Choose your favorite - whey, pea, or any plant-based option. It's all about what works for your dietary needs.
    • Oat Flour: A gluten-free and fiber-rich ingredient that gives a great texture similar to regular flour. You can find it in the baking aisle or make your own by grinding oats (more on this below!)
    • Peanut Butter: A source of healthy fats and flavor. Feel free to sub in another nut or seed butter of your choice for different dietary needs.
    Protein Cookie Dough Pinterest Regular Pins

    How do you make this edible protein cookie dough?

    This recipe comes together in no time! Just grab your food processor and a few pantry ingredients.

    • Soften the Dates: Microwave the Medjool dates for 20 seconds to soften them. This makes them easier to blend.
    • Blend Dates: Add the softened dates to a food processor and blend briefly to break them down into a paste.
    • Add Ingredients: Mix in the protein powder, oat flour, milk, peanut butter, vanilla extract, salt, chocolate chips, and any other add-ins. Blend until just combined. You don't want to overblend or it will become mushy.
    • Chill and Scoop: Let the mixture chill in the refrigerator, then scoop out your desired amount and enjoy. For an even firmer texture, chill longer or chill in the freezer.
    Blending protein cookies batter

    Can I make it without a food processor?

    It's possible to make this protein cookie dough with a high-powered blender. However, we recommend using a food processor for the best results in achieving the perfect texture.

    Can I make my own oat flour?

    Don't have oat flour or don't want to buy it? You can easily make your own oat flour. Simply blend ⅔ cup of regular rolled oats in a blender or food processor until they reach a fine, flour-like consistency. This will give you about ½ cup of oat flour needed for this recipe.

    Spoonful of cookie dough made with protein powder
    Bite of protein powder cookie dough

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair this cookie dough with a cup of milk or hot tea for a delightful dessert. You could even pair it with sliced fruit or yogurt for a quick and balanced snack during your work week.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If the dough is somewhat sticky, lightly dust your hands with oat flour while rolling.
    • Scaling Tips: Want to make a larger amount? Simply double or triple the ingredients and use a large food processor. This makes the dough perfect for meal prep or sharing with friends!
    Creamy peanut butter protein dough with chocolate chips, pre-scooped servings

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this cookie dough is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein powder and add-ins you want to use.

    • Protein powder of your choice: Feel free to use both your favorite flavor and type of powder. We usually use vanilla protein powder but you could experiment with chocolate or cookies and creme for a unique variation. Use a protein powder that works for your dietary needs such as whey, pea, or others.
    • Add-ins of your choice: If you like a classic chocolate chip cookie dough, then simply add more mini chocolate chips to the "¼ cup add-ins of your choice". This will give you a total of ½ cup mini chocolate chips in the dough. Otherwise, you can mix it up and add other creative mix-ins. Here are some ideas:
      • Chopped nuts
      • Dried fruit
      • Pumpkin seeds
      • Sprinkles
      • Toasted coconut flakes
      • Cacao nibs
      • Protein crisps
    You get to use any protein powder of your choice
    You get to use any add-ins of your choice

    Can you make this protein dough ahead of time?

    Definitely! This is a great recipe to meal prep ahead of time and store in the fridge for a quick, healthy snack anytime.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store cookie dough bites or jar in an airtight container for up to 7 days in the fridge or up to a month in the freezer.

    To freeze, place individual scoops on a parchment-lined baking sheet, freeze until solid, then transfer to a freezer-safe zip-top bag or reusable stasher bag.

    Storing extra cookie dough bites in reusable storage bag

    Could I bake this cookie dough if I wanted to?

    You can actually turn this into more of a cooked cookie if you want. To do this, partially flatten a 1-inch cookie dough bite and the microwave for 30-40 seconds. Let it cool and it should firm up into a soft cookie. Similarly, you can try baking at 350ºF for ~15 minutes to achieve a similar effect.

    Note: We've only briefly tested baking this cookie dough. It's primarily designed to be enjoyed without cooking, as the texture and taste are best then.

    Homemade protein cookie dough balls with chocolate chips on a grey plate

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Protein Cookie Dough 7
    Print Recipe
    Be the first to rate this recipe!

    Protein Cookie Dough

    Craving a healthy dessert? Try this Protein Cookie Dough with zero added sugars. You get to choose protein powder and add-ins of your choice too!
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Chill Time30 minutes mins
    Total Time35 minutes mins
    Course: Sweet Treat Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: healthy dessert
    Servings: 16 1-inch scoops
    Calories: 120kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Large Food Processor
    • Cookie Scooper

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup Natural Delights Whole Medjool Dates, pitted (about 8 to 10 dates)
    • ½ cup protein powder of your choice (Feel free to use your favorite flavor and type such as vanilla, chocolate, etc. As well as whey, soy, pea, etc.)
    • ½ cup oat flour see note on making your own from rolled oats
    • ¼ cup milk of your choice (cow's milk, almond, soy, oat, rice, coconut, cashew, hemp, flax, macadamia milk, etc.)
    • ¼ cup creamy peanut butter or nut butter of your choice (almond butter, cashew butter, sunflower seed butter, pumpkin seed butter, sesame tahini, walnut butter, hazelnut butter, etc.)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ cup mini chocolate chips
    • ¼ cup add-ins of your choice (more mini chocolate chips, chopped nuts, dried fruit, pumpkin seeds, sprinkles, toasted coconut flakes, cacao nibs, protein crisps, etc.)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Microwave Medjool dates for 20 seconds to soften.
    • Add Medjool dates to a food processor and blend for 10 seconds until mostly broken down.
    • Then, add protein powder, oat flour, milk, peanut butter, vanilla extract, salt, mini chocolate chips, and add-ins of your choice. Blend on low for about 10-20 seconds until just incorporated.
    • Chill the food processor bowl in the refrigerator for 30 minutes. Then, scoop out with a cookie scooper, roll into 1-inch balls with your hands, or transfer to a jar to enjoy.
    • Storage: Store cookie dough bites or jar in an airtight container for up to 7 days in the fridge or up to a month in the freezer. To freeze, place individual scoops on a parchment-lined baking sheet, freeze until solid, then transfer to a freezer-safe zip-top bag or reusable stasher bag.

    Video

    View this post on Instagram

    A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

    Notes

    Oat Flour Note: Don't have oat flour or don't want to buy it? You can easily make your own oat flour. Simply blend ⅔ cup of regular rolled oats in a blender or food processor until they reach a fine, flour-like consistency. This will give you about ½ cup of oat flour needed for this recipe.
    Dough Texture Note: If the dough is somewhat sticky when you’re attempting to scoop or roll, you may want to chill it for a bit longer, or even let it sit in the freezer for 10 minutes. You could also use a bit of oat flour on your hands when rolling to prevent it from sticking.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1scoop | Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 115mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Calcium: 31mg

    save this protein cookie dough recipe on pinterest:

    Save this edible protein cookie dough to meal prep

    Want more? Try these other recipes made with protein powder:

    • Protein Mug Cake
    • Vanilla Coffee and Medjool Date Protein Shake
    • High Protein Banana Bread

    Tuscan Farro Soup with White Beans and Kale

    January 11, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 9 Comments

    This Tuscan Farro Soup with White Beans recipe is perfect for those chilly nights when you crave something warm and comforting. It contains a mix of savory proteins, hearty whole grains, and leafy greens of your choice. It makes lots of leftovers and is freezer friendly. Plus, you can easily make it vegan.

    A bowl of Tuscan white bean and farro soup topped with shaved parmesan and kale.

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • What is farro?
    • Farro cooking guide
    • Is farro healthy?
    • What do you need to make tuscan soup?
    • How long does it take to make?
    • How to make this farro soup
      • Start with the base
      • Add the farro
      • Add the veggies
      • Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes
      • Add broth
      • Finish with greens and beans
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Is this recipe vegan friendly?
    • What leafy greens should I use?
      • But isn't kale on the dirty dozen list?
      • Is organic better?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this farro soup recipe on pinterest:

    This post was first published on November 1, 2020. It was updated on January 11, 2024 to include new photos and helpful tips.

    Why you'll love it

    It's always a good idea to have a soup recipe in your back pocket for those chilly months. This tuscan farro soup is hearty, nutritious, and flavorful. It's also freezer-friendly or can be stored in the fridge for several days, making it perfect for meal prep.

    What is farro?

    Farro has been such a fun whole grain to incorporate into recipes. It has a chewy texture and nutty flavor, making it perfect to mix up your typical rice routine.

    It's super versatile too-throw it over salads, in meal prep bowls, or as your base for healthy shrimp jambalaya.

    Farro cooking guide

    You may find different kinds of farro in the store. Here's how to adjust the cooking time.

    • Pearled Farro: Requires only about 15-20 minutes of boiling. It's processed to remove the bran, which shortens the cooking time.
    • Semi-Pearled Farro: Cook for approximately 25-30 minutes. This type has part of the bran removed but retains more nutrients than pearled farro.
    • Whole Farro: Needs the longest cooking time, typically around 35-40 minutes, as it retains the entire bran and germ layer.

    If your package of farro doesn't say what kind it is, just check on it at the 30 minute mark and cook longer if needed. 

    Hearty vegetable and farro stew garnished with cheese flakes, perfect for a cozy meal.

    Is farro healthy?

    This Tuscan soup has a blend of ingredients that support our health and well-being. Let me break down some of the dietitian-approved benefits:

    • Farro: A whole grain that's not only a delicious base for this soup but also a powerhouse of nutrition. While specific health benefits of farro are still being researched, whole grains like farro are known for their high fiber and protein content. Both protein and fiber are crucial for maintaining good digestive health and satiety.
    • Cannellini Beans: These beans are a fantastic source of plant-based protein, offering about 7 grams per 100g serving . Research shows beans may help regulate blood sugar levels, contribute to a healthy heart, and may even have cancer-fighting properties due to their high antioxidant content . 
    • Vegetables: The carrots, celery, and dark leafy greens in this soup are packed with essential vitamins and minerals. Carrots are a great source of beta-carotene, which is vital for eye health, while celery adds crunch and hydration due to its high water content. Leafy greens like kale are nutrient-dense, offering vitamins A, C, and K, as well as calcium and iron, essential for maintaining healthy bones and blood cells.
    Spoonful of soup

    What do you need to make tuscan soup?

    You'll need a few simple ingredients for this recipe:

    • Bacon or sausage is used to provide some savory umami flavors (omit if you are vegetarian or vegan).
    • Farro is a chewy grain that gives the soup some bite.
    • Carrots, celery, and onion, known as mirepoix, provide color and important nutrients.
    • Dark leafy greens of your choice are added at the end.
    • Cannellini beans (white beans) are a great source of plant based protein.
    • Spices pack in natural flavor and make this soup anything but boring.
    • Parmesan cheese adds creamy texture and umami flavor on top.
    Rustic Tuscan soup with beans, grains, and greens, topped with cheese in a white bowl.

    How long does it take to make?

    I love one pot meals because they come together in no time and make for easy clean up. This one pot soup is ready in less than 1 hour. It's one of my favorites to put on the table on a chilly night. I like to serve this soup with crusty, whole grain bread and salad.Try these other one pot meals like bean curry or tomato basil pasta.

    Nutritious and filling white bean soup with farro, served with a cheese garnish

    How to make this farro soup

    This one pot recipe uses minimal dishes and simple ingredients. Here's how to make it in under one hour.

    Start with the base

    Heat oil in a pot then add the bacon or sausage, and cook for about 3 minutes. It may look like a lot of oil at this point, but this makes a flavorful base to cook the rest of the ingredients in.

    Cooking bacon

    Add the farro

    Add the farro to the pot and cook, stirring often, until the grains are slightly darker, about 2 minutes. This toasting step enhances the nutty flavor of the farro.

    Adding farro

    Add the veggies

    Mix in onion, carrots, celery, garlic, and seasonings. Cook until everything is coated and the vegetables start to soften a bit.

    Add the veggies

    Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes

    Adding the tomato paste allows it to integrate into the flavors before adding the broth. You'll notice the mixture will be a bit darker red after stirring it in.

    Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes
    Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes

    Add broth

    Bring to a boil, then simmer until farro is tender, about 30 minutes. You can check a grain of farro to see if it's tender-just let it cool off before testing because it will be piping HOT.

    Add broth

    Finish with greens and beans

    Stir in kale and cannellini beans, cooking until the kale is wilted and the beans are heated through, adding a burst of nutrition and color.

    Finish with greens and beans
    Finish with greens and beans

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair this soup with crusty, whole-grain bread and a side salad for a complete meal.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If the farro is too chewy, simmer for 5 more minutes.
    • Scaling Tips: This recipe easily doubles or triples for larger crowds. Just increase the ingredients proportionally.
    Dipping bread in homemade Tuscan kale and white bean soup with a sprinkle of parmesan on top

    Is this recipe vegan friendly?

    If you are vegetarian or vegan, simply choose a "protein of your choice" that's plant-based such as Beyond sausage. Or you can omit this section entirely. Likewise, you can omit the parmesan cheese or substitute for nutritional yeast to bring that cheesy flavor.

    What leafy greens should I use?

    Like all of my other recipes, this Tuscan soup is completely customizable. Dark leafy greens are the perfect way to add some extra color into the soup. My favorite green to use in this tuscan farro soup is kale, but you can also use greens like escarole, chard, or spinach!

    If you have leftover kale, tear leaves into pieces and microwave into homemade kale chips.

    Leafy greens of your choice including spinach, kale, and chard

    But isn't kale on the dirty dozen list?

    Kale sometimes gets bad rap for being on the Dirty Dozen list, meaning it'd one of the crops containing the most pesticides. Even though it's on the list, that doesn't mean you should avoid kale. Kale is a rich source of vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, and gut-boosting fiber. Just be sure to give it a good rinse before adding into recipes.

    Is organic better?

    If you are worried about pesticides, you can opt for organic produce. However, recent literature shows that there's no significant difference in nutrient content, nutrient absorption or health risk in choosing organic over conventional foods. Ultimately, wash your produce before eating it and focus on getting a variety of colorful fruits and vegetables in your diet.

    Mason jar of soup

    How do I store leftovers?

    Since this recipe makes quite a bit, plan on having leftovers for a few days or freezing it for another quick meal in the future. You can store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days or freeze for 4-6 months. Perfect for meal prep!


    Enjoy this comforting Tuscan soup on a cold evening or as a wholesome meal any day of the week. It's a delightful way to warm up and nourish yourself!

    Nutritious and filling white bean soup with farro stored in a mason jar

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 22
    Print Recipe
    4.55 from 42 votes

    One Pot Tuscan Farro Soup with White Beans

    This farro stew is the perfect combination of savory protein, hearty whole grains, and healthy vegetables. Easy to make, quick cleanup, and freezer friendly!
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time40 minutes mins
    Total Time50 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Italian
    Keyword: dairy free, farro, farro soup, leftovers, meal prep, one pot dinner, soup, tuscan
    Servings: 8 servings
    Calories: 180kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon oil of your choice (olive oil, canola oil, avocado oil, etc)
    • Protein of your choice (6 slices uncooked bacon, 3 uncooked sausage links, OR 3 cooked sausage links. Whatever you choose, chop it into small ½-inch pieces) - see note for more details
    • 1 cup farro, uncooked
    • 1 small white onion, diced
    • 1 cup carrots, sliced
    • 3 celery stalks, sliced
    • 2 cloves garlic, minced
    • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning
    • Salt and pepper, to taste
    • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
    • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
    • 12 cups (96 ounces) low-sodium vegetable broth
    • 6 packed cups dark leafy greens of your choice, roughly chopped (Kale is my favorite to use. You can also use spinach, escarole, or chard)
    • 1 - 15- ounce can cannellini beans, rinsed
    • Shaved or shredded parmesan cheese, to taste (omit if vegan)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Heat oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add bacon and cook for about 3 minutes.
      Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 2
    • Add farro into pot and cook, stirring often, until grains are slightly darker, about 2 minutes.
      Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 3
    • Add onion, carrots, celery, garlic, and Italian seasoning to pot. Season with salt and pepper, to taste. Cook and stir occasionally until everything is coated, about 2 minutes.
      Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 4
    • Add tomato paste and red pepper flakes, and saute for 1 minute.
      Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 5
    • Add broth to pot and bring to a boil. Then, reduce the heat, cover, and let simmer until farro is tender, about 30 minutes.
      Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 7
    • Finally, stir kale and cannellini beans into soup and cook until kale is wilted, about 2 minutes.
      Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 8
    • Ladle hot soup into bowls and sprinkle with parmesan cheese, if desired. Store leftovers in fridge for up to 4 days or freeze for 4-6 months.
      Tuscan White Bean Farro Soup 16

    Video

    Notes

    Protein choice: You can either use bacon or sausage for this recipe. If using a traditional pork bacon or pork sausage, you will only need 1 tablespoon of oil since these pork products release oil as well. Feel free to use any of your favorites.
    You could also use a leaner turkey bacon, chicken sausage, or grass-fed beef sausage. However, since these products have less fat, it's recommend to add 2 tablespoons oil to the pot in this case.
    Finally, if you want to make this soup plant-based, feel free to add ~2 ounces plant-based sausage like this one from Beyond.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 180kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 340mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 4g

    save this farro soup recipe on pinterest:

    Pinterest Mackenzie will do

    Your Guide to Setting SMART Nutrition Goals

    January 9, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    In this post, we'll dive into the concept of SMART goals, talk about what each letter means, and learn how to set SMART nutrition goals that work for you.

    Have you ever set a goal, like improving a skill or sticking to a healthier routine, and then found yourself slipping back into old habits? Coming from a dietitian who coaches clients, we've seen this happen countless times. In fact, it's super common especially with the daily grind and curveballs of life.

    That's why the SMART goal-setting method can be a game-changer. It acts like a guide, helping you frame your goals more clearly and realistically. This method can be a key in making your ambitions happen, despite the challenges. Let's explore how it works.

    (This post is written by Cheerful Choices contributor, Ravin Garrett.)

    Meal planner surrounded by colorful fruits and veggies

    Table of Contents

    • Why SMART nutrition goal setting matters
    • What does S.M.A.R.T. Mean?
    • S: Specific
      • Example
    • M: Measurable
      • Example 
    • A: Achievable
      • Example
    • R: Relevant
      • Example
    • T: Time-bound
      • Example
    • How to have long-term success with goals
      • Set mini goals
      • Celebrate milestones
      • Have accountability
      • How technology can help
    • Key takeaways
    • Coaching + Cooking Program
      • save this SMART nutrition goals guide on Pinterest:

    Why SMART nutrition goal setting matters

    Goal setting can help put those seemingly out-of-reach ideas into an actionable plan. The key is creating personalized goals. This allows you to create a clear vision you can stick to long-term.

    Reaching BIG goals doesn't happen overnight.That's why it's important to split it up into "mini" SMART goals. Talking through mini goals is something registered dietitian, Mackenzie, works on with clients all the time in the "Coaching + Cooking" program.

    With smaller goals, you can slowly chip away at it and celebrate these milestones on your journey. Using SMART goals also gives you confidence and accountability needed to reach the goal. 

    Dietitian helping you set nutrition goals on computer

    What does S.M.A.R.T. Mean?

    SMART goals create more of a guided and clear-cut approach to those resolutions or habits. "SMART" is an acronym, with each letter having its own purpose to help you stay on track. 

    Here's what it stands for: S is for Specific, M is for Measurable, A is for Achievable, R is for Relevant, and T is for Time-bound. Let's dive into each letter and how they can apply to our goals. 

    Want to see them all spelled out on one page? Download our SMART Goals PDF here.

    Smart Goals PDF with examples for each letter

    S: Specific

    Specific means having crystal clear objectives and being as precise as possible on the goals that you want to achieve. Goals are not achieved overnight, so visualizing even the nitty-gritty details can help make that goal a reality. 

    Leafy greens

    Example

    For example, a goal like "Get more vegetables" or "Buy salads to eat all week" may sound like a solid statement, but it's still too broad. Instead, you might say something more specific like, "Purchase three different types of salad kits at Trader Joe's by Sunday evening, and prepare a salad for lunch on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday." 

    Here's another example of a specific goal: "Include leafy greens like kale, spinach, or chard in at least one meal daily." 

    Adding these three leafy greens is a great way to add vegetables to your diet for overall health and well-being. Load up on your veggies with a fruit smoothie with kale for breakfast to fill the body with vitamins and antioxidants to go into the day feeling your best. 

    Kale smoothie

    M: Measurable

    Measurable means having a way to track progress and measure the accuracy of your goals. Drinking more water is a goal that can use metrics to measure its progress along the way. There have been several new innovative ways to track water intake too. You might try tracking your water intake in an app or purchasing a motivational water bottle that gives you encouraging words and tracks your water intake throughout the day. 

    Example 

    Expanding "drink more water" into "Track my water and drink eight glasses every day" gives a way to measure the goal's progress. 

    You could track this goal by using water tracking apps or creating a water tracking sheet to put on your fridge and use stickers to mark your water.

    A: Achievable

    Achievable means keeping it real when setting goals. Be real honest with yourself: Can this goal happen in your time frame or based on your current finances? It can be easy to bite off more than you can chew, so ensure your goals align with your reality. 

    Instead of aiming for a goal that seems super far-fetched, think about creating multiple mini goals that allow you to see the goal as a journey. This can make it feel more attainable. Utilizing what you currently have allows you to achieve a goal anytime, even with limited resources.

    Example

    "Get in at least 30 minutes of moderate-intensity exercise 7x per week" may seem achievable to some, but to others, it may be a steep hill to climb. You could always break down this goal step-by-step, such as incorporating 10-15 minutes of low-moderate intensity for at least 2x weeks, then gradually increasing over the next few weeks. Instead of aiming for the goal immediately, this approach can make it feel less overwhelming and attainable in the future. 

    Writing down goals

    R: Relevant

    Relevant means setting goals that matter the most to your overall health and well-being. In other words, don't continually change goals to meet the latest health fad you hear about - stay focused on what YOU value.

    Also, make sure it's a goal that you'll want to stick with for a while. Progress takes time. If you are highly interested in the components of your goal, being able to stay on track will be a breeze. 

    Example

    Let's say you're very interested in learning more knife skills when it comes to chopping vegetables. And perhaps you learn best through short-form video or hands-on help rather than reading articles or just looking at photos. A relevant goal could be to "find one Instagram Reel or TikTok per week that shows off how to cut various fruits and vegetables, and then practice this method afterwards."

    Side note: Our Instagram @cheerfulchoices is choke-full of helpful kitchen hacks and cutting tutorials to watch. Plus, our "Coaching + Cooking" program is designed to give you hands-on help in the kitchen if that's one of your goals.

    Presenting Instagram @cheerfulchoices

    T: Time-bound

    Time-bound means putting a deadline or even a light sense of urgency to your goal. Incorporating this time element allows you to track progress with metrics. 

    A time-bound goal could also help with procrastination since the goal will have a specific time carved out to complete it each day with reminders to aid in success. 

    Example

    Example: "On Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, set your alarm for 5:00 a.m. and meditate before you start your busy day. Do this for the next two weeks."  This goal allows you to work around potential time restrictions and can kick start a calm day.

    Setting SMART goals on a notebook

    How to have long-term success with goals

    Now, let's make these goals last! These SMART goals allow you to tailor each letter into a way that can set you up for long-term success. Here are some other tips to keep the motivation going. 

    Set mini goals

    If you have one BIG goal, it can be helpful to break it up in 5, 10, or maybe even 20 mini goals over the course of a month to a year. Even small goals can create huge progress in your health. 

    For example, the American Heart Association states that individuals should engage in at least 150 minutes per week of moderate physical activity. Rather than trying to hit that all in one, perhaps try a daily 30-minute stroll to get the necessary requirements. 

    Celebrate milestones

    Hooray! Achieving a goal for a consistent amount of time shows steps towards making it a habit. Those small "mini goals" will turn into monumental milestones to celebrate. Don't brush it off and move onto the next goal too quickly. Take time to celebrate! Here's some ideas:

    • Throw yourself a mini celebration by creating your favorite nourishing dessert like "Snickers" Dates or a Protein Mug Cake. Bonus points for including a party hat, candle, and decorations! 
    • A night out to a local arts and crafts spot with those that are closest to you or your accountability buddy.
    • Treat yourself to a day of relaxation at the spa.
    • What's your jam that gave you motivation? Create a celebratory playlist with some of those songs that motivated you to push harder and dance away!
    Protein mug cake
    Snickers Dates

    Have accountability

    There may be a time where you need a little motivation along the way, this can even be someone just to be a listening ear or right there next to you at the gym. Accountability can be a huge factor in the consistency and long-term success of your goals. 

    As a registered dietitian nutritionist, I'm always SO excited to be your accountability partner. In my "Coaching + Cooking" program, we get to chat 1:1 and set SMART goals that work for you. Interested in learning more? Read about the program and book a FREE discovery call here!

    Virtual cooking session

    How technology can help

    New apps and technologies can help you track your SMART goals and even recommend personalized guidance. A wearable wrist watch to track workouts or encourage meditation is a great tool to increase physical activity. Various free apps can help in initial meal planning ideas, stress relief, exercising, and goal tracking too. You may also find goal inspiration on places like Tiktok or Instagram.

    Key takeaways

    As we step into a new year, it's a chance to embrace change and kickstart fresh endeavors. SMART goals serve as a great tool to bring your vision boards. Keep in mind, achieving goals is a journey that requires time and patience, and it's perfectly fine to modify them along the way.


    Need help from an expert? Our "Coaching + Cooking" program connects you with Mackenzie (a registered dietitian) who's ready to help with your nutrition and cooking goals in 2024! We even do personalized meal plans!

    Smiling in the kitchen

    Coaching + Cooking Program

    If you need more hands-on help with creating your SMART goals, check out this unique "Coaching + Cooking" program. In this program, you'll meet virtually with a dietitian and break down your nutrition and cooking goals into doable weekly goals. You'll also learn how to whip up easy and nutritious meals in the comfort of your own kitchen. Plus, having a registered dietitian on your side can help you stay accountable, achieve your goals, and reap the many benefits that come with living a healthy lifestyle. 

    Click here to learn more about the "Coaching + Cooking" program!

    save this SMART nutrition goals guide on Pinterest:

    Dietitian advice on setting nutrition smart goals

    Ravin headshot

    About the guest contributor: Ravin Garrett is a Nutrition MS student at Abilene Christian University, with a background in dietetics from Texas Southern University, planning to become a dietitian soon. With experience as a formula room tech and health coach, she applies SMART goals to assist a diverse range of clients, from those with diabetes to cancer. Her interests include media dietetics, sustainable food systems, and health coaching.

    Sushi Bake

    January 3, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

    This Sushi Bake is a fun twist on the classic sushi roll we all adore. It's a baked, deconstructed version of sushi, offering the same great flavors in a comforting, casserole-style dish. Plus, you get to customize with any sauce of your choice.

    Sushi bake in a pan garnished with avocado and green onions.

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Is sushi healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make this sushi casserole?
      • Prepare the sushi rice
      • Mix the salmon
      • Assemble and bake
      • Prepare the spicy mayo
      • Garnish with veggies and mayo
      • Serve with seaweed
    • What salmon should I use?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make it ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Want more? Try these other salmon recipes:

    Why you'll love it

    I love a good sushi roll, but I'll admit it-I'm way too lazy to make them at home. This sushi bake is the perfect solution because it's simple and only takes a few minutes to prep. 

    You also might like these sushi cups, which are SO easy to make as an appetizer idea.

    So what is a sushi bake?

    Sushi Bakes are an innovative way to enjoy sushi flavors without the hassle of rolling. Think of it like a sushi casserole! It's a layered dish, starting with a base of fluffy sushi rice, topped with a cream cheese salmon mixture, then baked to perfection. Then you'll cut it into small squares. We love serving these squares over seaweed sheets, almost like a taco!

    Cut out of Sushi bake with avocado, sesame, and green onion toppings
    Holding up freshly baked sushi casserole in a seaweed sheet

    Is sushi healthy?

    As a dietitian, I can say sushi is definitely a nourishing option. It provides a balance of carbohydrates, protein, and fat. Here's how:

    • Carbohydrates: Here we're using sushi rice. Rice provides nutrients like B vitamins and manganese, essential for energy production and overall health. 
    • Protein: Salmon is packed with healthy fats like omega-3 fatty acids, which are vital for brain health and reducing inflammation in the body.
    • Fat: In this recipe (and most sushi rolls) you'll find the fat in some form like avocado, mayo, or cream cheese. We're using all three and choosing lower fat mayo and cream cheese options for less saturated fat.  Avocado, in particular, is a great source of monounsaturated fats, known for their heart-healthy properties.
    Sushi bake ingredients on a white background

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Sushi Rice: The base of your sushi bake, sushi rice is sticky and holds the dish together. Look for it in the rice or international section of your grocery store.
    • Salmon: You can use fresh, frozen or even canned salmon for this recipe. If you don't like salmon, feel free to swap for cooked crab, cooked shrimp, or canned tuna.
    • Cream Cheese: Opt for a low-fat version to keep it lighter if you'd like.
    • Green Onions: They bring a fresh, zesty flavor. Find them in the produce section.
    • Avocado: A great source of healthy fats, it adds creaminess and richness. Pick ripe, slightly squishy avocados for the best flavor.
    • Mayonnaise: You can use a light mayo to cut down on calories without losing the creamy taste.
    • Sriracha Sauce: For that spicy kick! Adjust according to your heat preference.

    How do you make this sushi casserole?

    Prepare the sushi rice

    Cook your sushi rice and season it with vinegar, sugar, and salt.

    Sushi rice ingredients
    Fluffy cooked sushi rice

    Mix the salmon

    Combine your flaked salmon with cream cheese, green onions, and your chosen sauce.

    Cream cheese and salmon in a bowl
    Salmon mixed together in white bowl

    Assemble and bake

    Layer your rice and salmon mixture in a baking dish and bake until golden.

    Assembling sushi bake, starting with the rice
    Assembling sushi bake, adding the salmon
    Baked sushi with golden brown salmon

    Prepare the spicy mayo

    While the salmon sushi is baking, prepare the spicy mayo by mixing together light mayo, Sriracha, sauce of your choice, honey, and sesame oil.

    Spicy mayo mixed in white bowl

    Garnish with veggies and mayo

    Top with avocado, more green onions, and a drizzle of spicy mayo.

    Spicy mayo drizzled over baked sushi
    Sheet pan sushi bake sprinkled with sesame and chopped greens.

    Serve with seaweed

    Cut into squares and enjoy with seaweed snack sheets. Alternatively, you can use full nori sheet and cut them into smaller pieces.

    I've especially been loving serving this Sushi Bake with Geem Seaweed Chips - they literally have the BEST crunch and flavor ever!

    Sushi bake slice on plate with avocado and soy sauce.

    What salmon should I use?

    This recipe is a great way to use up leftover salmon. If you don't have any leftover salmon, you can also cook some from frozen salmon filets, fresh salmon filets, or even use 1 - 14 ounce can of canned salmon which is pre-cooked.

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Try pairing your sushi bake with a light cucumber salad, steamed edamame, or miso soup.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your rice is too sticky, wet your spatula with water when spreading.
    • Scaling Tips: You can easily double the recipe by using a larger baking dish and doubling the ingredients.
    Sushi bake portion with seaweed for serving

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this salmon sushi bake is completely customizable. You get to choose what kind of sauce and sugar you want to use.

    • Sauce of your choice: Use soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos depending on what you already enjoy or your dietary preferences. Tamari and coconut aminos are both gluten-free. We also love drizzling teriyaki coconut aminos over the final sushi bake!
    • Sugar of your choice: Feel free to use regular white sugar, a sugar-free alternative, or honey. This is used to subtly enhance the sushi rice's flavor, balancing the tanginess of the vinegar.

    Feel free to also customize the veggies on top by using options like thinly sliced radishes, shredded carrots, or diced bell peppers for crunch and color.

    Dipping sliced into soy sauce

    Can you make it ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Assemble your pan of sushi a day in advance and refrigerate. Then, bake it fresh when you're ready to serve.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. We often like to enjoy it cold over more seaweed sheets. You can also reheat in the microwave if you prefer it warm.

    Square cut out of sushi served on a plate

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Sushi Bake 12
    Print Recipe
    5 from 4 votes

    Sushi Bake

    This Sushi Bake is the perfect way to enjoy the flavors of sushi without the hassle of rolling. Think of it like a sushi casserole! We love serving this bake over seaweed sheets, almost like a taco!
    Prep Time15 minutes mins
    Cook Time45 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Asian
    Servings: 8 servings
    Calories: 270kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • 8"x8" pan baking dish
    • 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish
    • Ceramic sauce dipping bowls

    Ingredients

    Sushi Rice Ingredients:

    • 1 cup sushi rice, rinsed (makes about 3 cups cooked)
    • 1 ¼ cups water
    • 1 tablespoon rice vinegar
    • 1 tablespoon sweetener of your choice (white sugar, sugar-free alternative, or honey)
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    Salmon Topping:

    • 1 pound skinless salmon, cooked and flaked into pieces (about 2 heaping cups) - *see note: feel free to use canned salmon or a different fish
    • ½ cup sliced green onions, divided
    • ¼ cup 2 ounces low-fat cream cheese
    • 2 teaspoons sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
    • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder

    Spicy Mayo Ingredients:

    • ¼ cup light mayonnaise
    • 1 teaspoon Sriracha
    • 1 teaspoon sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
    • 1 teaspoon honey
    • ½ teaspoon sesame oil

    For Serving:

    • ½ cup avocado, diced into ¼-inch pieces
    • ½ cup cucumber, diced into ¼-inch pieces
    • 1 teaspoon black sesame seeds
    • 1 - 0.35 ounce package roasted seaweed snack sheets or seaweed chips
    • Sauce of your choice, for dipping (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos. We especially love dipping in teriyaki coconut aminos!)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Prepare a 8x8 or 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish with cooking spray.
    • Add rice and water to a medium pot over high heat. Bring to a boil, then reduce to low heat, cover with lid, and simmer until water is absorbed, about 15 minutes.
    • Remove from heat and let covered rice steam for an additional 10 minutes. Then, remove the lid and gently stir in rice vinegar, sugar, and salt.
    • In a separate bowl, combine cooked salmon, ¼ cup of the green onions, cream cheese, sauce of your choice, sesame oil, and garlic powder. Mix well until combined.
    • Spread the cooked sushi rice evenly over the prepared baking dish then layer over the salmon mixture.
    • Bake for 10 minutes, then broil for 1-2 minutes until slightly golden on top.
    • While the sushi pan is baking, in a small bowl whisk together all spicy mayo ingredients.
    • Remove sushi from the oven and drizzle spicy mayo on top. Then, garnish with ¼ cup remaining green onions, avocado, cucumber, and black sesame seeds.
    • Cut into squares and serve over seaweed snack sheets or chips. Dip into soy sauce if desired.

    Video

    Notes

    Salmon Note: This recipe is a great way to use up leftover salmon. If you don't have any leftover, you can also cook some from frozen filets, fresh salmon filets, or even use 1 - 14 ounce can of canned salmon which is pre-cooked.
    You could also swap for a different type of cooked fish like cooked crab, shrimp, or canned tuna. If using canned tuna, you can use 3 - 5 ounce cans or 5 - 3 ounce packets.
     
    Chip Note: I've especially been loving serving this Sushi Bake with Geem Seaweed Chips - they literally have the BEST crunch and flavor ever!
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 270kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 310mg | Potassium: 430mg | Fiber: 2.5g | Sugar: 3g | Calcium: 35mg

    save this baked sushi recipe on pinterest:

    Close up of bake with diced cucumber on top

    Want more? Try these other salmon recipes:

    • Nut Crusted Salmon
    • Air Fryer Bang Bang Salmon
    • Honey Soy Glazed Salmon

    Accordion Sweet Potatoes

    January 3, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    These Accordion Sweet Potatoes are seriously such a fun, creative addition to your holiday feast or weeknight dinner. Serve them as an appetizer or side dish that's sure to impress. Plus, you get to customize the potatoes with any spices of your choice and serve with a smoky aioli for dipping.

    Pulling apart accordion-cut sweet potatoes on a plate with smoked paprika aioli.

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Are sweet potatoes healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you cut accordion potatoes?
      • 1. Prep potatoes
      • 2. Make horizontal cuts
      • 3. Make diagonal cuts
      • 4. Season and add to baking sheet
    • Watch the tutorial
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you accordion potatoes with regular potatoes?
    • Can you make accordion potatoes ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this accordion potatoes recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more? Try these other sweet potato recipes:

    Why you'll love it

    This Accordion Sweet Potatoes recipe is a delightful addition to any holiday spread. The unique accordion-style slicing of the sweet potatoes creates such an impressive presentation too. I won't lie, they are a labor of love but SO worth it.

    Accordion Sweet Potatoes 15

    What are accordion sweet potatoes?

    The term "accordion" refers to the distinctive way in which the sweet potatoes are sliced before cooking. Almost similar to hasselback potatoes.

    After slicing them like an accordion, drizzle on oil, seasonings, and then pop them in the oven or air fryer. Once they're cooked they'll pull apart like an accordion. They're almost like a fun spin on traditional fries.

    Are sweet potatoes healthy?

    In addition to their delicious taste, sweet potatoes are rich in vitamins and fiber. Their vibrant orange color indicates high levels of beta-carotene, a nutrient converted to Vitamin A in the body. 

    By baking or air frying these potatoes with minimal oil, you're able to enjoy their natural sweetness without excess calories. 

    We're also serving them with an aioli using Greek yogurt for an extra protein punch.

    Accordion Sweet Potatoes 14

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Sweet Potatoes: Select medium-sized sweet potatoes that are firm and free from blemishes. Wash them thoroughly to remove any dirt or debris. Choosing sweet potatoes of similar size ensures even cooking. I often grab a bag of Bako Sweet Potatoes which are pre-washed and SO delish!
    • Cooking Spray: Opt for a cooking spray that is suitable for high-temperature baking. This helps prevent the sweet potatoes from sticking to the baking sheet and promotes even browning. Olive oil or avocado oil sprays are good choices.
    • Spices of your choice: Pick high-quality spices based on your flavor preferences. Buying spices in the bulk section of the grocery store can be cost-effective, allowing you to purchase small amounts of each spice needed for the recipe. Then, you can simply refill your own jars too.
    Bako Sweet accordion potatoes

    How do you cut accordion potatoes?

    The cutting technique for the accordion potatoes is the most important part. Let's break it down. Need more of a visual? Watch this video demoing the cutting in real time.

    1. Prep potatoes

    Begin by peeling the skin off the sweet potatoes. It's essential to start with a smooth surface for even slicing. Once peeled, use a sharp knife to cut the potatoes lengthwise into ½-inch thick slices. Typically, one sweet potato yields about three slices, so from four sweet potatoes, you should expect around 12 slices in total.

    Sweet potatoes on white marble
    Chop sticks next to sweet potato toast slice

    2. Make horizontal cuts

    Place a set of chopsticks on each side of one potato slice on your cutting board. These will act as guards, preventing the knife from slicing entirely through the potato. Carefully make small, close horizontal cuts across the length of the potato slice. The chopsticks will ensure you don't cut all the way through, keeping the bottom intact.

    Sweet potato toast slice between chopsticks

    3. Make diagonal cuts

    After completing the horizontal cuts, it's time to flip the potato slices over. Now, you'll repeat the cutting process, but this time with diagonal cuts. Again, position the chopsticks to avoid cutting through, and make close, diagonal cuts down the length of each potato slice. This dual slicing method is what creates the unique 'accordion' effect in the potatoes.

    Accordion sweet potatoes, cutting diagonally

    4. Season and add to baking sheet

    Once you've completed cutting all the potato slices, you should have a set of beautifully prepared accordion potatoes. These should now have a series of intricate cuts that will fan out slightly, perfect for seasoning and cooking. This method ensures not only an appealing look but also allows for even cooking and crispness in every bite.

    Accordion sweet potatoes on baking sheet with spices of your choice

    Watch the tutorial

    Need more of a visual of how to assemble these potatoes? Watch my tutorial video below.

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair accordion sweet potatoes with a light salad for freshness, or roasted vegetables for a well-rounded meal. The sweetness of the potatoes also complements savory protein dishes like grilled chicken or roasted turkey.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: Ensure the sweet potatoes are well-coated with cooking spray to prevent sticking. You can use parchment paper on the baking sheet for easier clean up too.
    • Scaling Tips: Feel free to double the recipe and use 8 sweet potatoes if you have them. You may want a chopping helper though!

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, these Accordion Sweet Potatoes are completely customizable. You get to choose what spices you want to use.

    • Spices of your choice - Feel free to experiment with a variety of spices, such as cinnamon and nutmeg for a sweet touch or smoked paprika and cumin for some heat, and even savory ones like rosemary or garlic powder.
    Golden brown sweet potato slices, served with light mayo aioli.

    Can you accordion potatoes with regular potatoes?

    Absolutely! Other potatoes varieties like Russets or Yukon Golds work well here. Follow the same methods for chopping. The cook time should generally be the same too-just keep an eye on them at the 30 minute mark to make sure they don't burn.

    Can you make accordion potatoes ahead of time?

    These Accordion Sweet Potatoes are best enjoyed fresh to preserve their crispy texture. You can prepare them ahead of time by cutting them into slices and small cuts. Then bake or air fry right before serving.

    How do I store leftovers?

    If you happen to have leftovers, store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat them in the oven or air fryer to revive their crunch.

    Cooked accordion potatoes on a dish with dipping sauce

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Accordion Sweet Potatoes 13
    Print Recipe
    5 from 2 votes

    Accordion Sweet Potatoes

    These Accordion Sweet Potatoes are seriously such a fun, creative addition to your holiday feast or weeknight dinner. Serve them as an appetizer or side dish that's sure to impress!
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Cook Time40 minutes mins
    Servings: 4 servings
    Calories: 190kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Sharp knife
    • Chopsticks

    Ingredients

    Sweet Potatoes:

    • 4 medium sweet potatoes, washed
    • Cooking spray
    • 1 tablespoon spices of your choice (cinnamon, nutmeg, smoked paprika, cumin, rosemary, thyme, garlic powder, etc.)

    Smoked Paprika Maple Aioli:

    • ¼ cup plain Greek yogurt
    • ¼ cup light mayonnaise
    • 2 tablespoons lemon juice, about 1 lemon juiced
    • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
    • 1 teaspoon garlic, minced
    • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Peel the sweet potatoes skin then use a sharp knife to cut potatoes into ½-inch slices lengthwise. Since 1 sweet potato gives you about 3 slices, you should get around 12 slices total.
    • Place chopsticks next to the potato slice to prevent cutting all the way through. Make small, close horizontal cuts down across the length of all the potato slices.
    • Then, flip the potato slices and repeat-this time with diagonal cuts downwards.
    • Place slices on either an oven baking sheet or air fryer basket. Then, spray each side of the slices with cooking spray and evenly sprinkle over seasonings.
    • Oven instructions: Place sheet pan in oven and bake at 425ºF for 40 minutes, gently flipping them with a spatula halfway through. Let them cool outside of the oven on the pan for 5 minutes before touching to avoid breakage.
    • Air fryer instructions: Alternatively, you can air fry at 400ºF for 15-17 minutes until crispy and golden. Let cool in the air fryer basket for 5 minutes before serving.
    • While the potatoes are cooking, prepare the aioli by mixing all ingredients together in a small bowl. Serve with accordion potatoes for dipping.

    Video

    https://www.instagram.com/p/Cztw7UmLzkL/

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 190kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Potassium: 550mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 10g | Calcium: 80mg | Iron: 1.3mg

    save this accordion potatoes recipe on pinterest:

    Learn how to make accordion sweet potatoes for the holidays or as an appetizer!

    Want more? Try these other sweet potato recipes:

    • Sweet Potato Power Bowl
    • Sweet Potato Kale Salad
    • Southwest Quinoa Salad

    Breakfast Charcuterie Board

    December 14, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 5 Comments

    Say hello to the brunch spread of your dreams! This breakfast charcuterie board allows you to mix and match pancakes, sausage, eggs, fruit, and toppings of your choice. You can even make a holiday-inspired breakfast board.

    Holiday breakfast charcuterie board ideas

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • What is a breakfast charcuterie board?
    • What goes on a breakfast charcuterie board?
      • 1. Pancakes
      • 2. Sausage
      • 3. Eggs
      • 4. Fruit & Jams
      • 5. Toppings & Extras
      • What should I put my breakfast charcuterie on?
    • Make your own holiday charcuterie board
      • Want more breakfast spread inspiration? Try these recipes:

    This post was first published on May 4, 2022. It was updated on December 14, 2023 to include new photos and helpful tips.

    What is a breakfast charcuterie board?

    Charcuterie boards, also known as snack boards, are all the rage nowadays. That's because they're so easy to make while also being instagram-worthy! They're essentially boards filled with a variety of different ingredients like meats, cheese, and dippers. A breakfast charcuterie board follows the same concept by combining a variety of breakfast faves like pancakes, sausage, eggs, and fruit. 

    Healthy breakfast spread

    What goes on a breakfast charcuterie board?

    Like all of my recipes, this beautiful brunch charcuterie board is completely customizable-mix and match from any of the following elements.

    1. Pancakes

    Pancakes are the star of the show for this board. Feel free to make your own homemade cakes or use a mix. I personally love whipping together these gluten-free oat flour pancakes! If you're more of a waffle fan, you can sub those too.

    2. Sausage

    Breakfast sausage is a great way to add in some protein and round out the board with a savory food. As a healthier choice, opt for grass-fed sausages, like these ones from Teton Waters Ranch. I love this brand because they are 100% grass-fed and finished, certified humane, and only contain a handful of ingredients.

    If you don't eat meat, feel free to swap for a plant based breakfast patty.

    Breakfast charcuterie board ideas

    3. Eggs

    Eggs are a breakfast staple. Feel free to cook your preferred method and then add to your board. It's typically easiest to scramble or hard boil them. However, you could also try for sunny side up and serve it in a tiny skillet over your board. 

    If you're vegan, try scrambling up these vegan eggs from JUST Egg.

    4. Fruit & Jams

    When it comes to fruit, add over any of your favorites! Popular options include berries, bananas, and orange slices but anything goes here. During the holidays, it's super fun to serve this board alongside a watermelon christmas tree made with a foam cone too!

    I also recommend having some jams to lather over the pancakes. For a healthier jam, try making your own homemade chia seed jam.

    5. Toppings & Extras

    Don't leave those pancakes plain. Be sure to have plenty of topping choices on your board. Here are some great options you could include:

    • Nut or seed butters 
    • Yogurt
    • Chocolate chips
    • Maple syrup
    • Butter
    • Toasted coconut flakes
    • Sliced almonds
    • Whip cream
    • Homemade granola

    What should I put my breakfast charcuterie on?

    It's usually best to break out your largest wooden board to build your breakfast platter on. If you don't have a wood board, you could also use a serving tray, cutting board, or lay parchment paper down on a kitchen island and build it on top.

    Start by adding pancakes to the center then layer all other ingredients around it. Have fun with it and feel free to look up images for inspiration!

    Grabbing a pancake from brunch charcuterie board

    Make your own holiday charcuterie board

    The holidays are an ideal time to share a breakfast platter with friends and family. Serve before the day's festivities or as a weekend brunch board.

    You can elevate your board from everyday to extraordinary, by adding fun holiday props alongside your board. This healthy breakfast is filled with a balance of protein and carbohydrates to give you lasting energy throughout the day. Plus, you can easily customize this board it to fit various dietary preferences.

    On this board, I've used Red's Egg'Wiches to fill both the "egg" and "sausage" option. Simply microwave from frozen then add to your platter.

    Holiday breakfast charcuterie
    Breakfast Charcuterie Board 2
    Print Recipe
    5 from 3 votes

    Breakfast Charcuterie Board

    Say hello to the brunch spread of your dreams! This breakfast charcuterie board allows you to mix and match with your favorites.
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Total Time20 minutes mins
    Course: Breakfast Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 1 board
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • Pancakes prepared from favorite recipe or a mix*
    • Grass-fed breakfast sausage
    • Cooked eggs of your choice (scrambled, hard boiled, or fried)
    • Fresh fruit of your choice (bananas, strawberries, raspberries, blackberries, blueberries, orange slices, etc.)
    • Fruit Jam
    • Nut or seed butter of your choice (peanut butter, almond butter, cashew butter, etc.)
    • Yogurt of your choice (flavored or plain)
    • Chocolate Chips
    • Maple Syrup
    • Butter
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Mix and match any ingredients from the above list.
    • Arrange all ingredients on a wooden board or serving platter. 
    • Store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

    Video

    Notes

    *Need a pancake recipe? Check out my easy oat flour pancakes!

    Want more breakfast spread inspiration? Try these recipes:

    • Baked Oats
    • High Protein Banana Bread
    • Egg White Frittata
    • Blueberry Pancake Bake

    save this breakfast platter on pinterest:

    Build your own breakfast board

    Air Fryer Egg Rolls

    December 7, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    These Air Fryer Egg Rolls are ideal to make as an easy and delicious appetizer. They contain a delightful blend of carrots, cabbage and sauce that is air fried to golden perfection. There's also the option to add in shredded chicken or turkey-perfect for using up those holiday leftovers!

    Air fried egg rolls with sweet chili dipping sauce

    Disclosure: This post is sponsored by Libby's® Vegetables. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Egg rolls vs spring rolls
    • What are the main ingredients you'll need?
    • How do you make these air fryer egg rolls?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Using leftover holiday turkey
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make egg rolls ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
      • Check out these other healthy air fryer recipes too:
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this air fryer egg roll recipe on pinterest:

    Why you'll love it

    Imagine biting into a perfectly crispy egg roll, filled with a vibrant mix of cabbage and tender sliced carrots from Libby's Vegetables. These Air Fryer Egg Rolls are not just a treat for your taste buds, but they're also incredibly easy to make. Trust me, they're a crowd-pleasing appetizer or even a light meal.

    Plus, by using the air fryer you achieve that crunchy texture without excess oil from deep frying. This makes them an overall more nourishing option.

    Are canned carrots healthy?

    Absolutely! Carrots are packed with essential vitamins and minerals. Here, I'm using Libby's Vegetables, which are made with US-grown carrots. They're prepared within hours from the farm where they were harvested, sealing in goodness, flavor and vibrant orange color.

    Canned carrots are super versatile too. Try roasting with honey garlic butter, adding to a cozy chowder, or serving in these air fried egg rolls.

    Wood platter presenting air fryer egg rolls and green onions next to Libby's carrots

    Egg rolls vs spring rolls

    Egg rolls and spring rolls are both beloved appetizers, each with unique characteristics. The names can sometimes be interchanged but in general, this recipe is more aligned with an egg roll.

    • Origin: Egg rolls are a product of Chinese-American cuisine, tailored to American palates and popularized in Chinese-American communities. Spring rolls have roots across Asia and have different variations across Chinese, Vietnamese, Thai, and Filipino cuisines.
    • Wrappers: Egg rolls are often wrapped in a thicker dough made from wheat. Spring rolls are more commonly wrapped in a translucent wrap made from rice flour, although some spring rolls may call for egg roll wraps.
    • Fillings: Egg rolls are commonly filled with cooked ingredients like proteins, cabbage, and carrots. Summer spring rolls are usually served cold and wrapped in fresh vegetables like lettuce, bean sprouts, and herbs.
    All ingredients for egg rolls layed out on blue backdrop
    Green onion tops vs green onion whites

    What are the main ingredients you'll need?

    • Libby's Sliced Carrots: These vibrant carrots add a natural sweetness with very little prep work-that's a win in my books. Look for them in the canned vegetables aisle.
    • Cabbage: Sometimes you can find pre-shredded cabbage in a bag, otherwise, you can buy a whole head of cabbage and quickly slice it at home.
    • Green Onions: These provide a mild onion flavor and a pop of color. For this recipe, we're splitting it up into the green tops and the white bottoms. The white part will be sauteed whereas the green parts will be used for garnish.
    • Egg Roll Wrappers: Typically available in the refrigerated section, these thin sheets of dough are the perfect vehicle for your delicious filling. Sometimes they are called spring roll wrappers as well.
    Egg rolls in air fryer basket
    Crispy egg rolls cooked in air fryer basket

    How do you make these air fryer egg rolls?

    • Prepare the Filling: Sauté cabbage, green onions, and carrots with optional protein in a skillet.
    • Wrap It Up: Spoon the filling onto egg roll wrappers, fold, and roll tightly. Seal the edges with a dab of water. If you are new to rolling egg rolls, start with a smaller amount of filling (⅓ cup) as this will be easier to wrap. Once you feel confident, you can fill it with a larger amount (½ cup).
    • Air Fry: Preheat your air fryer, spray the rolls with oil, then air fry until golden brown and crispy. Remember, don't overcrowd your air fryer basket for the crispiest results!
    • Egg Roll Process Shots 2
    • Egg Roll Process Shots 3
    • Egg Roll Process Shots 4
    • Egg Roll Process Shots 5
    • Egg Roll Process Shots 6
    • Egg Roll Process Shots 7
    • Egg Roll Process Shots
    • Egg Roll Process Shots 1

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair these spring rolls with a refreshing cucumber salad or a bowl of hot and sour soup.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your rolls aren't as crispy as you'd like, ensure you haven't overfilled them. You may have to air fry for an extra 1-2 minutes as everyone's air fryers are different.
    • Scaling Tips: Want to make a big batch? Double or triple the ingredients. Just keep in mind: you'll have to work in batches as the air fryer basket can likely only hold about 6-8 egg rolls at a time.
    Air Fryer Egg Rolls 2

    Using leftover holiday turkey

    Got leftover turkey from the holiday feast? Don't let it go to waste! This recipe offers a unique and delicious way to repurpose your leftover turkey. Instead of the usual sandwich or soup, add shredded turkey or chicken inside these crispy rolls. It's a creative and flavorful way to make the most out of your holiday leftovers!

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this egg roll recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what sauce you want to use.

    • Sauce of your choice: To give the vegetables some extra flavor, we're stirring in a tablespoon of either soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos. Use your favorite depending on what you already have on hand and suit your dietary preferences. Tamari is gluten-free and coconut aminos are both gluten-free and soy-free.
    Air fryer egg rolls served on wood platter with sauce

    Can you make egg rolls ahead of time?

    Absolutely! You can prepare the rolls and seal them without frying. Store them in the refrigerator for a day or two, ready to be air-fried whenever you're craving a crispy bite.

    You can even freeze them before frying by wrapping them individually with wax paper and saran wrap. To air fry egg rolls from frozen, preheat your air fryer to 350ºF like normal. Then simply air fry for a bit longer-about 15 minutes.

    Hand dipping air fryer egg roll in sauce

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store any extras in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. To preserve their crispiness, reheat them in the air fryer at 350°F for about 4 minutes.

    Check out these other healthy air fryer recipes too:

    • Air Fryer Crispy Chickpeas
    • Air Fryer Edamame
    • Air Fryer Salmon Bites with Bang Bang Sauce
    • Mexican Street Corn Style Air Fryer Potatoes

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Air Fryer Egg Rolls 12
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Air Fryer Egg Rolls

    These Air Fryer Egg Rolls are ideal to make as an easy anddelicious appetizer. They contain a delightful blend of carrots, cabbage andsauce that is air fried to golden perfection. There's also the option to add inshredded chicken or turkey-perfect for using up those holiday leftovers!
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time20 minutes mins
    Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Asian
    Keyword: air fryer
    Servings: 6 to 8 large egg rolls
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon avocado oil or olive oil
    • 1 - 14.5 ounces can Libby's Sliced Carrots, drained and sliced into strips
    • 2 cups shredded green cabbage
    • 4 green onions, thinly sliced and separating out the green tops from the white bulbs*
    • 1 tablespoon sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
    • 1 teaspoon Sriracha
    • Optional: 1 cup shredded cooked chicken or leftover cooked turkey
    • 1 package of 6-inch wide egg roll wrappers (We won't use all of them but they typically come in a standard pack)
    • Cooking spray
    • ¼ cup cup sweet chili sauce
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat.
    • Add shredded cabbage and green onion white bottoms and saute for 3 minutes.
    • Stir in carrots and optional chicken or turkey and saute for 2 more minutes.
    • Finally, stir in sauce of your choice and Sriracha then remove from heat.
    • Place the wrapper like a diamond towards you. Spoon about ⅓ to ½ cup of the filling onto the bottom corner of the wrapper.
    • Fold the bottom corner over the filling, then fold in the sides, and roll it up tightly. Use a little water to seal the top corner of the wrapper. Repeat with the remaining mixture to make 6-8 rolls in total.
    • Preheat your air fryer to 350°F. Lightly spray both sides of the egg rolls with cooking spray then arrange them in a single layer in the air fryer basket. Make sure they are not touching or overlapping.
    • Air fry for 10-12 minutes, turning halfway through, until golden brown and crispy.
    • Let cool in the air fryer basket for 2 minutes before removing and placing onto a serving plate. Garnish with green onion tops and serve with sweet chili sauce for dipping.

    Video

    https://www.instagram.com/p/C0kDpz8Rz5B/

    Notes

    Green Onion Note: Use the whole green onion and separate the green tops from the white bulbs. You should end up with about ¼ cup green tops and ¼ cup white bottoms. We sauté the white slices and save the green slices for garnishing.
    Serving Note: If you’re using no chicken or turkey, this will yield about 6 rolls. If you’re adding the chicken or turkey, it will make about 8 rolls.
    You can also view this recipe on Libby’s Vegetables website here.

    save this air fryer egg roll recipe on pinterest:

    Save this homemade air fryer egg rolls with dipping sauce on Pinterest

    Fruit Christmas Tree

    December 4, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

    This Fruit Christmas Tree is the perfect edible centerpiece for your holiday gatherings. Crafted with fresh watermelon and green grapes, it's a nutritious treat that is sure to impress all your guests. Plus, it's a fun activity to get kids or friends involved in making.

    Watermelon Tree 8 1

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by The Watermelon Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! ]

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Can you find watermelon in the winter?
    • Is watermelon healthy?
    • Can watermelon make you happy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How to make a fruit christmas tree
      • 1. Skewer the fruit
      • 2. Fill in with mint
      • 3. Add star topper
      • 4. Dust with powdered sugar
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Perfect for the holidays 
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make this fruit tree ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this fruit christmas tree recipe on pinterest:
      • Want more? Try these other holiday snacks:

    Why you'll love it

    The Christmas tree made with fruit is not only visually stunning but it's also a fresh addition to your holiday table. Serve this watermelon tree at weekend brunch or next to a game night charcuterie board as a colorful and refreshing addition. Plus, it's a nutritious and hydrating alternative to traditional holiday sweets.

    Watermelon Tree 11 1

    Can you find watermelon in the winter?

    You might associate watermelon with the sunny days of summer, but did you know that it's available year-round? Watermelon is grown in over 30 U.S. states several months out of the year. (Use this chart to see where watermelon comes from throughout the year). When domestic production of watermelon slows down in the colder months, it's imported from Central American countries within a few days of picking.

    During the winter, you can find it in mini seedless form or "fresh cuts" which are pre-cut and ready to go.

    For this recipe we are using a mini seedless watermelon, cutting it in half, and scooping into spheres. If you can't find mini watermelons, you can use the fresh cut cubes and place them on the toothpicks in the same manner.

    So, whether it's a warm summer day or a chilly winter morning, you can savor the taste of watermelon and use it to create this Fruit Christmas Tree.

    Watermelon Tree 2 1
    Freeze Watermelon

    Is watermelon healthy?

    Watermelon offers a wealth of vitamins and minerals. In fact, just two cups of watermelon has 80 calories alongside vitamins A (8% DV), B1 (8% DV),  B6 (8% DV), and C (25% DV), and the minerals potassium (6% DV), magnesium (6% DV), and phosphorus (2% DV). With 80 calories per 2-cup serving, watermelon can be a smart option for those watching their weight.

    With its high water content (92% water), watermelon is also an excellent choice for staying hydrated. 

    Can watermelon make you happy?

    According to a 2022 survey from the National Watermelon Promotion Board, 82% of watermelon purchasers say eating watermelon boosts their mood! They also found that 100% of respondents said watermelon makes them feel either very happy (70%) or somewhat happy (30%). 

    This means during the holiday season, adding watermelon into the mix is the perfect way to boost the cheery spirit and make your celebrations even merrier.

    Mackenzie Burgess holding up fruit tree recipe

    What ingredients do you need?

    Just gather 3 ingredients and a handful of craft supplies for this watermelon christmas tree.

    • Mini Seedless Watermelon: Look for a watermelon with vibrant green skin and one that feels heavy for its size-that means it's extra juicy. 
    • Green Grapes: Choose a bag of plump, crunchy green grapes. Their crisp texture and sweet flavor will provide a delightful contrast to the watermelon. Ensure they are thoroughly washed and dried before use.
    • Powdered Sugar: While this is an optional ingredient, it enhances the tree's holiday appeal with a touch of edible "snow".
    • Foam Cone: This foam cone serves as the structural base for your Fruit Christmas Tree. You can typically find foam cones at craft stores or dollar stores.
    • Cling Wrap: Cling wrap is typically recommended to cover the foam cone with so the food isn't directly in contact with it.
    • Toothpicks: You'll need toothpicks to skewer the watermelon balls and grapes, helping you assemble the tree's colorful "ornaments" securely. Make sure to have enough toothpicks on hand to complete the entire tree.
    • Star Stencil: This stencil or cookie cutter will help you achieve a crisp star shape. Simply lay it on your piece of rind, trace with a marker, and cut this out with a knife. You could also use a different topper such as cheese or a piece of foam.
    Watermelon Tree 14 1

    How to make a fruit christmas tree

    Gathering friends, family, and kiddos to create this Fruit Christmas Tree together not only adds to the enjoyment but also helps it come together quickly. Here's how to make it:

    1. Skewer the fruit

    Start with layering on the watermelon and then add over the green grapes. We like to add them in sporadic places until the whole cone is filled.

    Watermelon Tree 3 1

    2. Fill in with mint

    Fresh mint makes the tree smell super fresh and also gives it more of a tree look.

    Watermelon Tree 4 1

    3. Add star topper

    The watermelon rind makes a super fun and unique topper. Carefully at this to a toothpick on the top grape.

    Watermelon Tree 17 1

    4. Dust with powdered sugar

    Use a fine mesh strainer to lightly sift and dust the entire tree with powdered sugar. This gives it a snowy finish. Keep in mind, this powdered sugar may get a little messy and fall onto the areas around the tree.

    Watermelon Tree 5 1

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Display your Fruit Christmas Tree on a decorative plate or platter to elevate its presentation. Encourage guests to pluck their favorite fruits directly from the tree.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: When skewering the watermelon balls and grapes, make sure to use toothpicks that are sturdy enough to hold the fruit securely. Also, the sharper the toothpick, the easier it will be to press it into the tough foam cone.
    • Scaling Tips: You can adjust the size of your Fruit Christmas Tree by choosing a larger or smaller foam cone and using more or fewer watermelon balls and grapes.

    Perfect for the holidays 

    The Fruit Christmas Tree is truly a showstopper at holiday gatherings. Its vibrant colors and creative design make it a fantastic addition to Christmas, New Year's, or any festive occasion. It's a centerpiece that's sure to spread joy to all who partake.

    Watermelon Tree 9 1

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this holiday tree is completely customizable. You get to choose what "snow dusting" you want to use.

    • Snow dusting ingredient of your choice: We prefer using powdered sugar for the most genuine snow effect. However, if you don't have powdered sugar or want to limit added sugar, you could also use white edible glitter, a stevia-based confectioners sweetener, or shredded coconut.

    Can you make this fruit tree ahead of time?

    While you can wrap the cone, wash the fruit, and get all supplies gathered-we'd recommend waiting until the day of to assemble your tree with the fruit. This allows it to taste and look its best.

    Watermelon Tree 13 1

    How do I store leftovers?

    If you do end up with some extra fruit that hasn't been gobbled off the tree, you can remove it from the toothpick and store it in an airtight container for snacking on over the next few days.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Watermelon Tree 10 1
    Print Recipe
    5 from 3 votes

    Fruit Christmas Tree

    This Fruit Christmas Tree is the perfect edible centerpiece for your holiday gatherings. Crafted with fresh watermelon and green grapes, it's a nutritious treat that is sure to impress all your guests. Plus, it's a fun activity to get kids or friends involved in making.
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Course: Snack Choices
    Keyword: holiday
    Servings: 1 Fruit Christmas Tree
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Star-shaped stencil, print out, or cookie cutter
    • Foam cone (3.7in x 8.9in)*
    • Cling wrap
    • Toothpicks

    Ingredients

    • 1 mini seedless watermelon
    • 1 -1.5 pound bag of green grapes
    • 1 - 0.5 ounce package fresh mint leaves
    • Snow dusting ingredient of your choice (We prefer using powdered sugar but if you're wanted to cut back on the added sugar, you could also use white edible glitter, a stevia-based confectioners sweetener, or shredded coconut)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Prepare watermelon balls by cutting the watermelon in half and using a melon baller to create balls from both sides of the watermelon. Then, cut off a thin piece of rind and use a star stencil as a guide to trace with a marker and cut the rind into the star "topper".
    • Cover foam cone in cling wrap and add to plate or preferred serving base. We recommend doing this now as it's more difficult to transport once it's fully built.
    • Push toothpicks halfway into the foam then add over watermelon balls. Continue in random places until about halfway filled, leaving space for the grapes.
    • For the remaining open areas, push toothpicks halfway into the foam then add over green grapes. Add 3-5 green grapes to the top of the cone to create the full tree shape.
    • For any remaining gaps, fill in with fresh mint leaves (no toothpicks needed here).
    • Insert a toothpick into the top most grape and skewer the watermelon rind star on top.
    • Right before serving, use a fine mesh strainer to lightly sift and dust the entire tree with powdered sugar or snow dusting ingredient of your choice. This gives it a festive snowy finish.

    Video

    https://www.instagram.com/p/C0cf3zCvsUJ/

    Notes

    *Foam Cone Note: You can find foam cones available at craft stores or your local dollar store. For this recipe, I am using a 3.7" x 8.9" medium sized cone. If you are serving a large crowd, you could also use a 3.8" x 11.9" cone and buy a bit more fruit to fill it up. The foam cones also come in different colors. We grabbed a green one but you could also use white.

    save this fruit christmas tree recipe on pinterest:

    Pinterest Mackenzie will do 1

    Want more? Try these other holiday snacks:

    • Gingerbread Mug Cake
    • Watermelon Walnut Currant Chutney
    • Date Snickers
    • Snack Board
    • Chocolate Popcorn

    Bejeweled Rice

    November 29, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

    This Bejeweled Rice recipe is perfect for turning any meal into a special celebration. It contains crave-worthy saffron-infused rice, studded with a colorful array of "jewels" like blueberries, glazed carrots, and toasted nuts. Try making this colorful jeweled rice during the holidays and serve alongside your favorite protein.

    Decorative Bejeweled Rice, colorful toppings, blue background on white platter

    Table of Contents

    • What is bejeweled rice?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make jeweled rice?
      • 1. Make the rice
      • 2. Add green onions and blueberries
      • 3. Add glazed carrots and toasted nuts
      • 4. Add golden raisins and drizzle in oil
    • Perfect for the holidays
    • This is recipe vegan?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make it ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this jeweled rice recipe on pinterest:
      • Want more? Try these other holiday dishes:

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by the U.S. Highbush Blueberry Council. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    What is bejeweled rice?

    Bejeweled Rice, also known as Persian Jeweled Rice, is a sensory delight. It combines a bed of fluffy basmati rice topped with sweet blueberries, buttery carrots, and crunchy nuts. 

    It's also SO simple to make and will leave your guests super impressed. We make it every year for Christmas and it's always a hit! 

    Plus, if you're an avid "Swiftie" like us, you'll love how this rice is inspired by the song "Bejeweled".

    Artfully arranged Bejeweled Rice with vibrant toppings and carrots and green onions on the side

    Is this rice dish healthy?

    Along with this dish being a beautiful display, it's also a nutritious choice. The combination of ingredients offers a balance of carbohydrates, healthy fats, and essential nutrients. We also consider this dish an easy and colorful way to rest your gut during the holiday season. In fact, did you know blueberries can really be a star ingredient for our gut?

    Gut health benefits of blueberries

    Recent research shows a positive link between blueberries and gut health. A new study published in Nutrients looked at the effect of blueberry consumption on symptoms and overall quality of life in 43 adults ages 18-60 with a BMI of 18.5 - 32.9 kg/m2 having irritable bowel syndrome or functional dyspepsia or both over a six week period.

    The researchers found that daily consumption of blueberries relieved abdominal symptoms and improved general markers of well-being in people with gastrointestinal disorders. They found these effects observed when consuming an equivalent of 1 ¼ cup of blueberries daily. 

    Researchers suggest that the symptom relief may be due to the polyphenols in blueberries, which may have potential antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, antibacterial and neuroprotective properties. 

    Green onions, blueberries, carrots, raisins, almonds laid out on blue backdrop

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Basmati Rice: Known for its long grains and fragrant aroma, you can easily find it in the rice section of your local grocery store.
    • Saffron Threads: These precious strands add a luxurious golden hue to the rice. You can find saffron in the spice aisle or at your local global market. It can be quite pricey so you might consider purchasing a small amount.
    • Nuts: Choose your favorites to add a delightful crunch.
    • Butter:  Used to add a rich flavor to the carrots. If you're vegan, feel free to substitute for olive oil
    • Carrots: Sliced into thin ¼-inch rounds for an elegant appearance.
    • Green Onions: Providing a pop of bright green as one of the jewels.
    • Fresh Blueberries: Bursting with naturally sweet flavor and vibrant color. Blueberries are also a good source of fiber with 4 grams fiber per serving.
    • Golden Raisins: Adding a sweet and chewy contrast to the ensemble.
    • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Optional, but finishes the "jewels" with a beautiful shine.

    How do you make jeweled rice?

    This recipe may take a bit more detail and time to assemble but trust us- it's worth every effort! Here's how to make it:

    1. Make the rice

    Toasting the rice adds extra complexity to each grain. Then add over boiling water to speed up the heating process, let simmer, and stir in your saffron.

    Before transferring to a platter, make sure you have all your "jewels" prepped and ready to add.

    Saffron rice
    Saffron rice on platter

    2. Add green onions and blueberries

    These are the first two ingredients to top our jeweled rice. With each ingredient, carefully place them in a diagonal line.

    Adding blueberries
    Adding rest of ingredients

    3. Add glazed carrots and toasted nuts

    Glazing the carrots allows them to become tender and makes them look more like jewels too. Toasting the sliced almonds makes these extra nutty and delicious. 

    4. Add golden raisins and drizzle in oil

    Finally, add your golden raisins as the last jewel for our colorful rice. Optionally, drizzle everything with a little extra virgin olive oil for added shine!

    If you're not out to impress anyone, you're also welcome to just toss everything together instead of layering it. 

    Colorful Bejeweled Rice on plate with gold utensils
    Jeweled Rice all mixed together

    Perfect for the holidays

    This Jeweled Rice is seriously a showstopper on any holiday table. Its vibrant colors and luxurious flavors make it a perfect addition to Thanksgiving, Christmas, or any special celebration. It's the dish that will have everyone saying "Wow!" and craving seconds.

    This is recipe vegan?

    This recipe calls for butter but you can easily swap for olive oil or plant butter to make this recipe vegan-friendly.

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Bejeweled Rice pairs wonderfully with roasted chicken, baked salmon, or our lamb meatballs. Feel free to add a dollop of yogurt or feta on top of the rice for extra creaminess. Other flavorful ingredients like pickled red onions or chopped cilantro pair well with this rice as well.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: To avoid sticky rice, rinse it thoroughly before cooking and fluff it gently with a fork after cooking to separate each grain. When toasting nuts, watch them closely to prevent burning.
    • Scaling Tips: This recipe makes enough for about 8 people, but you can always double it for larger gatherings. 

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, Bejeweled Rice is completely customizable. You get to choose your favorite nuts to use.

    • Nuts of your choice - In the photograph, we're showing off toasted sliced almonds. You could also use pistachios, chopped cashews, walnuts, or any other nuts you have on hand.
    Colorful ingredients next to saffron rice one pot

    Can you make it ahead of time?

    We recommend making this recipe fresh for the best results. That's because if you were to make it ahead of time and reheat it, the blueberries would burst and become messy. Plus, the rice tends to taste best fresh.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. To reheat, simply microwave your preferred portion. Just keep in mind when reheating, the blueberries will become hot and burst open.

    Colorful Bejeweled Rice on plate with gold utensils

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Bejeweled Rice 6
    Print Recipe
    5 from 2 votes

    Bejeweled Rice

    This Bejeweled Rice recipe is perfect to serve during the holidays alongside your favorite protein. It's studded with a colorful array of "jewels" like blueberries, glazed carrots, and toasted nuts.
    Prep Time15 minutes mins
    Cook Time45 minutes mins
    Total Time1 hour hr
    Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Persian
    Keyword: holiday
    Servings: 8 servings
    Calories: 280kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Large Platter

    Ingredients

    Rice Ingredients:

    • 2 tablespoons butter (or olive oil if vegan)
    • 2 cups basmati rice, rinsed well and soaked for 30 minutes
    • 3 cups boiling water
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon 1 large pinch saffron threads, soaked in 3 tablespoons of hot water for 30 minutes

    "Jewel" Ingredients:

    • ½ cup chopped nuts of your choice (sliced almonds, pistachios, cashews, walnuts, etc.)
    • 1 tablespoon butter
    • 2 cups carrots, cut on a bias into ¼-inch slices (about 3 large carrots)
    • ½ cup green onions, thinly sliced (about 6 individual stalks)
    • 1 cup fresh blueberries
    • ¼ cup golden raisins
    • Optional but recommended: 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    Rice Instructions:

    • In a medium pot or deep saute pan, melt butter over medium heat. Add soaked rice and toast for 1 minute. Add boiling water and salt. Bring to a boil, then cover with a tight fitting lid and reduce heat to low. Cook for 15 minutes, then remove from heat with lid still on and let steam for an additional 15 minutes.
    • When rice is done cooking, gently fluff with a fork. Then, spoon over saffron water in various parts of the rice, so it stains some part of the rice, but not all of it.

    "Jewel" Instructions:

    • Toast nuts by adding them to a dry pan over medium heat. Toss frequently until golden and aromatic, about 3-5 minutes. Set aside.
    • To the same pan over medium heat, add carrots along with 1 tablespoon butter and ¼ cup water. Let simmer for 8-10 mins until tender and liquid has evaporated, stirring occasionally. Season with salt and pepper, to taste.

    Assembly Instructions:

    • Transfer saffron rice to a large 16-inch platter then in neat rows layer over ingredients in the following order from top to bottom: green onions, blueberries, glazed carrots, toasted nuts, and golden raisins.
    • Optional but recommended: For a more decadent and moist rice texture, evenly drizzle extra virgin olive oil over the entire platter of rice. This gives the jewels a nice "shine" too!

    Video

    https://www.instagram.com/p/C0PyYTYrJ9k/

    Notes

    If you don't feel like layering, you can just mix all the toppings into the rice before arranging on the platter. It just may not look quite as pretty. 🙂

    Nutrition

    Calories: 280kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 320mg | Potassium: 280mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Calcium: 40mg

    save this jeweled rice recipe on pinterest:

    Save this Bejeweled Rice on Pinterest

    Want more? Try these other holiday dishes:

    • Lamb Meatballs
    • Blueberry-Glazed Roasted Turkey
    • Deconstructed Chicken Pot Pie
    • Turkey Tenderloin Sheet Pan Meal

    Honey Soy Glazed Salmon

    November 27, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled, pan seared, baked, or air fried salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you'll want to eat on repeat. Perfect to make for the holidays too!

    This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled or pan seared salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you’ll want to eat on repeat. #SalmonRecipes #HoneySoy #Grilling #Umami

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love this honey soy glazed salmon
    • What are the health benefits of salmon?
    • How do I cook salmon fillets?
      • Cooking salmon in a pan
      • Cooking salmon on the grill
      • Cooking salmon in the oven
      • Cooking salmon in the air fryer
    • How do I make the honey soy glaze?
    • Can you double the recipe?
    • What else should I serve with this honey soy glazed salmon?
    • Customize it your way
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this honey soy glazed salmon recipe on pinterest:
      • Check out these other healthy salmon recipes:

    This post was first published on June 11, 2020. It was updated on November 27, 2023.

    Why you'll love this honey soy glazed salmon

    This salmon is the perfect combo of sweet and savory. We've made it hundreds of times and it's always a crowd pleaser. Plus, the ease of switching up cooking methods - be it grilling, pan-searing, baking, or air frying - means this salmon recipe will work for any kitchen setup.

    What are the health benefits of salmon?

    Salmon is an incredible source of healthy fats, specifically a type called omega-3 fatty acids. Omega-3 fats have been proven to be heart healthy as they can help reduce risk for heart disease and stroke. 

    Salmon is also a great source of lean protein and vitamin D-which can be hard to find in food sources. Overall, we should aim to eat fish at least twice a week.

    How do I cook salmon fillets?

    For this recipe, you can cook the salmon fillets several different ways. Buying salmon fillets pre-cut makes for easy portions and plating. Alternatively, you can also buy one pound of salmon whole.

    Cooking salmon in a pan

    First, add olive oil to a large skillet over medium-high heat. Then, add your salmon fillets, skin side down. Cook for about 4-5 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillet, then flip. Cook for another 4-5 minutes until salmon flakes easily with a fork.

    Cooking salmon on the grill

    Here's how to make honey soy grilled salmon.

    First, make sure your salmon and grill is well oiled. Then, add your salmon fillets skinless side down on the grill-this ensures you get those delicious grill marks on top. Cook for about 4-5 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillet, then carefully flip onto the skin side. Cook for another 4-5 minutes until salmon flakes easily with a fork. You can also simply wrap the salmon in foil and cook for 10-12 minutes until done. 

    This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled or pan seared salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you’ll want to eat on repeat. #SalmonRecipes #HoneySoy #Grilling #Umami
    Honey soy glazed salmon

    Cooking salmon in the oven

    You can bake salmon too. Cook salmon fillets or whole salmon in the oven at 425 degrees. I usually bake salmon for about 8-12 minutes depending on the thickness on your fillet. You'll know it's done when the salmon flakes easily with a fork.

    Cooking salmon in the air fryer

    Air frying is perfect during the summertime when you don't want to heat up your oven. Cook salmon fillets or whole salmon in the air fryer at 400 degrees. I usually air fry salmon for about 7-10 minutes depending on the thickness on your fillet. You'll know it's done when the salmon flakes easily with a fork.

    How do I make the honey soy glaze?

    The honey soy glaze comes together in no time. Simply add all glaze ingredients to a small saucepan and stir over medium heat for 5-7 minutes until glaze is slightly thickened. Don't leave the glaze on the heat for too long or it will become overly thick. 

    The key to this glaze is the fresh ginger and fresh garlic which add that savory, umami flavor. You want to make sure the ginger and garlic are very finely grated. They should be almost into a paste-like consistency so they mix easily with the other liquid ingredients. To save time, you can buy pre-made ginger and garlic paste in the produce section.

    For extra flavor, we're also marinating the salmon in half of the sauce for 15 minutes.

    This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled or pan seared salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you’ll want to eat on repeat. #SalmonRecipes #HoneySoy #Grilling #Umami

    Can you double the recipe?

    If you're serving a crowd for a dinner party or holiday gathering, you can easily double the recipe.

    What else should I serve with this honey soy glazed salmon?

    Serve with jasmine rice and grilled or sautéed vegetables of your choice to create a balanced meal. Vegetables that pair well with this dish are bok choy, broccoli, asparagus, or summer squash. You can also try different protein options like chicken, tofu, or edamame. 

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this honey soy glazed salmon is completely customizable. You get to choose what sauce you want to use.

    • Sauce of your choice - Use soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos depending on what you already enjoy or your dietary preferences. Tamari and coconut aminos are both gluten-free. Coconut aminos is also soy-free.
    • Honey or maple syrup - Even though this recipe calls for honey, we've also tested it with maple syrup and it works great too! Feel free to sub it 1:1 with honey.

    How do I store leftovers?

    You can store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled or pan seared salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you’ll want to eat on repeat. #SalmonRecipes #HoneySoy #Grilling #Umami
    Honey Soy Glazed Salmon 1 scaled
    Print Recipe
    4.80 from 5 votes

    Honey Soy Glazed Salmon

    This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled, pan seared, or baked salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you'll want to eat on repeat this summer.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time20 minutes mins
    Total Time30 minutes mins
    Cuisine: Asian
    Keyword: grill, protein, salmon
    Servings: 4 servings
    Calories: 380kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup honey (can also sub with maple syrup)
    • ½ cup sauce of your choice (low sodium soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
    • 2 tablespoons rice vinegar
    • 1 tablespoon grated fresh ginger
    • 1 tablespoon grated fresh garlic, about 2 cloves
    • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
    • 1 whole pound salmon fillet or 4 - 4 ounce salmon fillets
    • Freshly ground black pepper, to taste
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil or avocado oil, for cooking
    • Cooked jasmine rice, for serving
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    Glaze Instructions:

    • In a small pot, whisk together honey, sauce of your choice, rice vinegar, ginger, garlic, and sesame seeds until well combined.
    • Pour half of the mixture over the salmon fillets in a sealable bag or glass container and let marinate for 15 minutes.
    • With the remaining sauce in the pot, bring to medium heat. Stirring often, cook the sauce until it's slightly thickened into a glaze, about 5-7 minutes.

    Cooking Instructions:

    • To cook salmon on a pan: Heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Season the salmon fillets with pepper, then cook skin side down for 3-4 minutes. Flip and cook for another 3-4 minutes until the salmon flakes easily with a fork.
    • To cook salmon on the grill: Preheat grill to 400-450ºF. Rub oil all over the salmon fillets then season with pepper. Add salmon fillets skinless side down on the grill-this ensures you get those delicious grill marks on top. Cook for about 4-5 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillet, then carefully flip onto the skin side. Cook for another 4-5 minutes until salmon flakes easily with a fork. Alternatively, you can wrap the salmon in foil and grill for 10-12 minutes.
    • To cook salmon in the oven: Preheat oven to 425ºF. Place salmon fillets skin side down on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper or greased with oil. Season with pepper then cook for 8-12 minutes, or until fish flakes easily with a fork.
    • To cook salmon in the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400ºF. Place salmon fillets skin side down in an air fryer basket lined with parchment paper or greased with oil. Season with pepper then cook for 7-10 minutes, or until fish flakes easily with a fork.
    • After cooking: Spoon prepared soy glaze over cooked salmon fillets and serve over jasmine rice, if desired.

    Notes

    Note: Cooking times may vary based on the thickness and size of your salmon fillet.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1g | Calories: 380kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 1300mg | Potassium: 570mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 35g | Calcium: 23mg | Iron: 1.4mg

    save this honey soy glazed salmon recipe on pinterest:

    4 1

    Check out these other healthy salmon recipes:

    • Nut Crusted Salmon
    • Salmon with Pineapple Salsa
    • Grilled Mediterranean Bruschetta Salmon
    • Air Fryer Salmon Bites with Bang Bang Sauce

    Sheet Pan Green Beans with Alfredo Sausage

    November 16, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 12 Comments

    This sheet pan green beans recipe is perfect for the busy holiday season when you're craving a comforting dish without the hassle. It contains flavorful Italian sausage, creamy alfredo sauce, and Libby's® Vegetables Naturals Cut Green Beans. Plus, you get to customize it with any cheese of your choice.

    Sheet Pan Green Beans 4

    Disclosure: This post is sponsored by Libby's® Vegetables. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make sheet pan green beans with sausage?
    • Can I use fresh green beans instead of canned?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Making these cheesy green beans dish ahead of time
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this cheesy sheet pan green beans recipe on pinterest:
      • Want more? Try these other holiday side recipes:

    Why you'll love it

    Get ready to fall in love with the simplicity and rich flavor of this sheet pan green beans recipe! The Italian sausage provides a savory punch, while the alfredo sauce adds creaminess, making every bite heavenly. All you need is one skillet and one sheet pan, meaning there's minimal cleanup.

    We're also using canned green beans as a nutritious, time saving option. Simply open, drain, and add to your sheet pan.

    Sheet Pan Green Beans 5

    Are canned green beans healthy?

    Absolutely! Green beans are packed with essential vitamins and minerals. Here, I'm using Libby's Vegetables, which are grown by American farmers to provide exceptional taste and crisp-tender texture.       

    For the recipe, we specifically chose to use Libby's Vegetables Naturals Cut Green Beans, which have no added salt. What's inside the can, you ask? Just green beans and water - that's it!

    This is an ideal recipe to use canned green beans. Normally you would have to steam green beans before adding them to a sheet pan, but we get to skip that step with Libby's ready-to-go canned green beans!

    Sheet Pan Green Beans
    Sheet Pan Green Beans 6

    What ingredients do you need?

    Chances are that most of the ingredients you need are already in your kitchen. Here's what to grab:

    • Italian Sausage: Choose your favorite Italian sausage-it can be mild or hot. You could also opt for turkey or chicken sausage instead or pork if you prefer.
    • Alfredo Sauce: You'll find alfredo sauce in the pasta aisle of most grocery stores.
    • Libby's Vegetables Naturals Cut Green Beans: These canned green beans are convenient and delicious, making them a perfect addition to your holiday menu. Drain and pat them dry for the best results.
    • Italian Seasoning: A blend of oregano, basil, thyme, and other herbs-adds Italian flavor to your holiday dish. The aroma of these seasonings will fill your kitchen and make it smell SO good.
    • Cheese of your choice: The gooey, melted cheese adds an umami flavor in addition to extra protein.
    • Red Pepper Flakes: This recipe calls for just a small amount to give it a mild kick. Add a bit more if you like it spicier!

    How do you make sheet pan green beans with sausage?

    • Add Green Beans: Once drained, spread these out in an even layer on a sheet pan and season.
    • Brown Sausage: We like to break up the sausage into tiny pieces before adding over the creamy alfredo sauce.
    • Assemble: Add the sausage mixture on top of the green beans and gently press down. Then top with cheese and bake.
    • Serve: The beauty of this sheet pan recipe is that it can be served as either a side dish or a main dish. See some pairing suggestions below.
    Sheet Pan Green Beans 2
    Sheet Pan Green Beans 3

    Can I use fresh green beans instead of canned?

    Yes! I prefer using canned to save time but fresh green beans work great in this recipe too. Start by trimming the ends off the green beans, then steam them for about 5-6 minutes or blanch them in boiling water for 3-4 minutes until they're tender-crisp. After cooking, drain them well and pat them dry with a clean towel or paper towel-this helps prevent extra moisture from watering down the dish.

    From there, add them to the recipe just as you would the canned green beans. Fresh green beans provide a slightly firmer bite.

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: We love pairing this recipe with roasted fingerling potatoes or sweet potato cubes. It's also great with fresh rolls or a refreshing green salad.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If you don't have a quarter sheet pan, you can also use a larger sheet pan and just nudge the ingredients together to resemble a 13"x9" shape.
    • Scaling Tips: Hosting a larger gathering? Feel free to double the recipe-just be sure to use a half sheet pan (~18″x13″) in this case.
    Sheet Pan Green Beans 15

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this green bean dish is completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese you want to use.

    • Shredded cheese of your choice: Mozzarella is a classic choice, but feel free to experiment with other cheese varieties like parmesan, cheddar, or a blend.

    Making these cheesy green beans dish ahead of time

    To make it ahead of time, prepare the dish up until the baking step, cover it tightly, and refrigerate for up to 2 days. When you're ready to enjoy, simply pop it in the oven, and voila! It's ideal for meal prepping or making ahead for a busy holiday celebration or weeknight.

    Sheet Pan Green Beans 7

    How do I store leftovers?

    You can store extras in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. To reheat, simply microwave for 1 minute.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Sheet Pan Green Beans 13
    Sheet Pan Green Beans 17
    Print Recipe
    5 from 3 votes

    Sheet Pan Green Beans with Alfredo Sausage

    This sheet pan green beans recipe is perfect for the busy holiday season when you're craving a comforting meal without the hassle. It contains flavorful Italian sausage, creamy alfredo sauce, and canned green beans. Plus, you get to customize it with any cheese of your choice.
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Cook Time30 minutes mins
    Total Time35 minutes mins
    Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: holiday, sheet pan
    Servings: 8 servings
    Calories: 310kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Quarter Sheet Pan (roughly 13"x9")

    Ingredients

    • 1 - 16 ounce package Italian sausage
    • ½ cup alfredo sauce
    • 2 cans (14.5 oz. each) Libby's Naturals Cut Green Beans, drained and pat dry
    • 3 teaspoons italian seasoning, divided
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 ½ cups or 5 ounces shredded cheese of your choice (Pictured is mozzarella cheese but you could also use parmesan, cheddar, or a blend.)
    • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 425ºF. Line a quarter sheet pan (roughly 13"x9") with parchment paper or grease with cooking spray.
    • In a large skillet over medium heat, brown the sausage for 5-6 minutes, breaking it into small pieces. Stir in the alfredo sauce and 1 teaspoon of Italian seasoning, cooking for an additional 2 minutes until warmed.
    • Add drained green beans to the prepared sheet pan and season with the remaining 2 teaspoons of the Italian seasoning and black pepper.
    • Top the green beans with the alfredo sausage mixture, pressing it down gently, and then top with shredded cheese.
    • Bake for 15-20 minutes until the cheese is golden brown on top. Remove from oven and top with red pepper flakes before serving.

    Video

    View this post on Instagram

    A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary + Media Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

    Notes

    You can also view this recipe on Libby's Vegetables website here.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving (about 4x4" piece) | Calories: 310kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 680mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g

    save this cheesy sheet pan green beans recipe on pinterest:

    Sheet Pan Green Beans with Alfredo Sausage Pinterest Regular Pins

    Want more? Try these other holiday side recipes:

    • Corn Fritters
    • Creamy Corn & Pea Pasta Salad
    • Air Fryer Edamame with Brussels Sprouts

    Air Fryer Corn Fritters

    November 15, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 3 Comments

    These air fryer corn fritters are the perfect side for the busy holiday season. They contain the goodness of Libby's Whole Kernel Sweet Corn alongside your favorite cheese and seasonings, served with a smoked paprika maple aioli for dipping. Plus, they're made in the air fryer for a lighter take on this indulgent classic.

    Air Fryer Corn Fritters 7

    Disclosure: This post is sponsored by Libby's® Vegetables. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Is canned corn healthy?
    • How do you make air fryer corn fritters?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Dip options
    • Making this fritters recipe ahead of time
    • How do I store leftovers?

    Why you'll love it

    Imagine biting into a crispy, golden fritter with a burst of sweet corn in every bite! These air fryer corn fritters are a taste sensation. They're quick to make, customizable, and perfect for both beginners and seasoned cooks. Whether you're hosting a holiday gathering or just want a cozy snack, these fritters will become your go-to option.

    Air Fryer Corn Fritters 5

    Perfect for the holidays

    In the whirlwind of the holidays when your oven's full and you're short on time-these fritters will save the day. Thanks to Libby's Vegetables, there's no washing, peeling, or dicing involved. Simply open, drain, and mix. Since the prep work is done for you, you can spend more time with those who matter most: friends and family.

    Not only do these fritters save you precious time, but they're also cost-efficient, adding flavorful value to your dishes without breaking the bank.

    Air Fryer Corn Fritters 12

    Is canned corn healthy?

    Absolutely! Libby's is made with US-grown corn and is picked at the peak of ripeness and canned within hours, sealing in the nutrients and flavor.      

    What's inside the can? Just corn, water, and sea salt! That's right-no preservatives or added sugars.      

    Canned corn is super versatile too. Serve as a standalone side dish or incorporate into delicious recipes that come together in no time, like a taco salad or these fritters.

    Air Fryer Corn Fritters 11

    How do you make air fryer corn fritters?

    Here's how to throw together these fritters in less than 30 minutes.

    • Mix It Up: Combine your dry ingredients, add corn and egg, and voila - your batter is ready.
    • Shape and Fry: Shape into fritters, pop in the air fryer, and cook until golden perfection is achieved.
    • Whip Up the Aioli: While your fritters cook, mix Greek yogurt, mayo, lemon juice, garlic, maple syrup, and smoked paprika for the perfect dipping sauce.
    Air Fryer Corn Fritters
    Air Fryer Corn Fritters 1
    Air Fryer Corn Fritters 3

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair your fritters with a fresh salad and cooked protein for a well-rounded meal. You can also add to your holiday table as a fun and unique side dish that the whole family will love.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If needed, you can add flour over your hands to help prevent sticking when forming the patties. If you find the corn fritter batter is a bit crumbly when trying to form the patties, don't fret. Simply form into thicker balls first, then place them in the air fryer basket and use a fork to press down into the thin 3-inch patty shape. As they cook, they become crispy and firm.
    • Scaling Tips: Easily double or triple the recipe for a party-you may just have to cook in a few different batches depending on the size of your air fryer.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of our other recipes, these fritters are completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese and seasonings you want to use.

    • Shredded cheese of your choice: We love to use a classic sharp cheddar cheese, but you could also use mozzarella, parmesan, Monterey jack, or whatever you have on hand.
    • Seasonings of your choice: We tend to use a mixture of garlic powder and everything bagel seasoning to fill up the 1 tablespoon total. You could also use paprika, onion powder, lemon pepper, or an all-purpose seasoning. Use what you enjoy and have in your pantry!

    Dip options

    For this fritter recipe, we're whipping up a slightly sweet and smoky aioli to use as a dip. You're also welcome to explore other dip options like a spicy Sriracha mayo, garlic herb sauce, cilantro lime crema, or ranch.

    Air Fryer Corn Fritters 9

    Making this fritters recipe ahead of time

    Feel free to prepare the batter a day before and then form into patties and air fry when you're ready. This make ahead prep makes this recipe ideal for the holidays.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. To reheat, simply pop them in the microwave for 30 seconds or air fry at 370°F for 3 minutes.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Air Fryer Corn Fritters 4
    Print Recipe
    5 from 3 votes

    Air Fryer Corn Fritters

    These air fryer corn fritters are the perfect side for the busy holiday season. They contain the goodness of Libby's Whole Kernel Sweet Corn alongside your favorite cheese and seasonings, served with a smoked paprika maple aioli for dipping. Plus, they're made in the air fryer for a lighter take on this indulgent classic.
    Prep Time15 minutes mins
    Cook Time10 minutes mins
    Total Time25 minutes mins
    Course: Appetizer
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: holiday
    Servings: 8 fritters
    Calories: 100kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    Fritter Ingredients:

    • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • ¼ cup breadcrumbs
    • ¼ cup shredded cheese of your choice (sharp cheddar, parmesan, mozzarella, etc.)
    • 1 tablespoon seasonings of your choice (garlic powder, everything bagel, paprika, or a mixture etc.)
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped chives or 1 teaspoon dried chives
    • ½ teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 - 15.25 ounce can Libby's Whole Kernel Sweet Corn, drained and patted dry with paper towel (about 1 ½ cups)
    • 1 large egg, beaten
    • Cooking spray

    Maple Aioli Ingredients:

    • ¼ cup plain Greek yogurt
    • ¼ cup light mayonnaise
    • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
    • 1 tablespoon pure maple syrup
    • 1 teaspoon garlic, minced (about 1 clove)
    • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika
    • Salt and pepper, to taste
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • In a mixing bowl, stir together flour, breadcrumbs, cheese, seasonings, chives, baking powder, salt, and pepper.
    • Then, add corn and egg and mix together with a fork until a thicker batter forms.
    • Using your hands, shape the batter into 8 thin fritters that are about 3 inches wide.*
    • Preheat your air fryer to 370°F (185°C) for about 2 minutes. Then, lightly spray the air fryer basket with cooking spray or use parchment liners to prevent sticking.
    • Add fritters to the air fryer and spray the tops of the fritters with a bit of cooking spray.
    • Cook for 8 minutes, flipping the fritters halfway through. You may need to work in batches depending on the size of your air fryer.
    • After cooking, let cool in the basket for 2 minutes before serving.
    • In a small bowl, mix all aioli ingredients together to serve with the fritters for dipping.

    Video

    https://www.instagram.com/p/CzrF79wrwGi/

    Notes

    *Batter Note: If you find the corn fritter batter is a bit crumbly, form into thicker balls first. Then place them in the air fryer basket and use a fork to press down into the thin 3-inch patty shape. As they cook, they become crispy and firm.
    Storage Note: These fritters are best enjoyed fresh, but you can also store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. To reheat, simply pop in the microwave for 30 seconds or air fry at 370°F for 3 minutes.
    You can also view this recipe on Libby’s Vegetables website here.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1fritter | Calories: 100kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Calcium: 63mg

    Want more? Try these other holiday recipes

    • Accordion Sweet Potatoes
    • Corn & Cheese Mini Tarts
    • Cheesy Corn and Rice Casserole
    • Deconstructed Chicken Pot Pie
    • Sheet Pan Turkey Tenderloin
    • Air Fryer Egg Rolls - with leftover turkey

    save this corn fritters recipe on pinterest:

    Pinterest Mackenzie will do

    Three Cheese Mac and Cheese - Baked with Breadcrumbs!

    November 14, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 8 Comments

    Sharp cheddar, muenster, and asiago makes for an indulgent, three cheese mac and cheese. Sprinkle on homemade breadcrumbs and bake to perfection! Feel to to customize by using any milk of your choice.

    Three Cheese Mac and Cheese

    Table of Contents

    • Are there healthier swaps you can do?
    • Can I make these into bites?
    • How to make bread crumbs for mac and cheese
      • Looking for more hands-on help in the kitchen?
    • save this three cheese mac and cheese recipe on pinterest:

    This post was first published on May 15, 2021. It was updated on July 27, 2022 [to include new photos and helpful tips.

    I've been making this homemade three cheese mac and cheese ever since I was a little girl. In my house, it's named after Cheerful Choices owner ,Mackenzie, and known as "Mack's Mac and Cheese." We've made this recipe countless times and it is always a crowd pleaser! We love serving this dish alongside a light salad or some air fried green beans.

    Are there healthier swaps you can do?

    Macaroni and cheese is a classic comfort food dish. It's the perfect combo of creamy, cheesy pasta goodness. However, there are a few things you can do to give it a little bit of a nutrition boost.

    • Swap out the white pasta and white breadcrumbs for their whole grain counterparts. "Whole" grains have the bran, germ, and endosperm (AKA all the good parts filled with fiber, vitamins, and minerals) whereas white or "refined" grains undergo a process that removes the germ and bran.
    • You can also use skim milk and reduced-fat cheddar cheese because these items provide the same level of protein while reducing the saturated fat content. If you're looking to stay indulgent though, use whole milk and regular cheddar cheese.

    Can I make these into bites?

    If you're looking for the perfect party appetizer, you can easily turn these into mac and cheese bites! Simply divide them among lined muffin tins, sprinkle with breadcrumbs, and bake at 350 for 15-20 minutes. I also like to stir in a bit of riced cauliflower with the cheese sauce to pump up the nutrition of this mac and cheese without changing the flavor.

    Cauliflower Mac and Cheese Bites

    How to make bread crumbs for mac and cheese

    Skip the store bought stuff and make your own breadcrumbs. Simply rip up whole grain bread slices into pieces. Then, toast them for 10 minutes at 350 degrees until slightly golden. Finally, use your hands to crush them up into smaller pieces to sprinkle over the mac and cheese before baking.

    Breadcrumbs
    Sharp cheddar, muenster, and asiago makes for an indulgent, three cheese Homemade Breadcrumb Baked Mac and Cheese. Some simple healthy recipe swaps help reduce the fat, maintain the protein and increase the fiber content of this classic recipe.
    Breadcrumbs 1

    Looking for more hands-on help in the kitchen?

    You've come to the right place. It's my biggest passion to help busy people with minimal cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen. Click here to learn more about my virtual nutrition Coaching + Cooking program!

    Sharp cheddar, muenster, and asiago makes for an indulgent, three cheese Homemade Breadcrumb Baked Mac and Cheese. Some simple healthy recipe swaps help reduce the fat, maintain the protein and increase the fiber content of this classic recipe.
    Print Recipe
    4.67 from 6 votes

    Breadcrumb Baked Mac and Cheese

    Sharp cheddar, muenster, and asiago makes for an indulgent, three cheese mac and cheese. Sprinkle on homemade breadcrumbs and bake to perfection!
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Cook Time20 minutes mins
    Total Time40 minutes mins
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: cheese, mac and cheese, protein, vegetarian, whole grains
    Servings: 12 servings
    Calories: 370kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 3 cups uncooked whole grain elbow macaroni
    • ½ cup (1 stick) unsalted butter
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper
    • 6 tablespoons flour
    • 3 cups dairy milk of your choice (skim milk, 2% milk, or whole milk)
    • 4 oz Muenster cheese, shredded
    • 4 ounces Asiago cheese, shredded
    • 8 ounces sharp cheddar cheese, shredded
    • 2 cups whole wheat breadcrumbs or 3 slices whole grain bread **see note
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Lightly grease a 2-quart baking dish.
    • In a large pan, cook macaroni to al dente according to package instructions. Drain and set aside.
    • In a small saucepan, melt butter. Stir in salt, pepper, and flour until combined.
    • Slowly pour in milk and bring to a boil. Let simmer for 2 minutes, then reduce to low heat and stir in all cheeses until creamy. Pour cheese sauce over drained pasta and stir gently to combine.
    • Pour macaroni in the prepared baking dish. Top with breadcrumbs and bake at 350 degrees for 20 minutes or until cheese is bubbly.

    Notes

    ** We love to make homemade breadcrumbs. Simply rip bread into medium-sized pieces and pop it into the 350 degrees pre-heated oven for 10 minutes while you prepare the pasta and cheese sauce. Then, pull it out of the oven and crush it up into small pieces to sprinkle over the mac and cheese.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1g | Calories: 370kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 430mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g

    save this three cheese mac and cheese recipe on pinterest:

    Three cheese mac and cheese with cheddar, muenster, and asiago

    Roast Beef Sliders

    October 27, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    These mouthwatering Roast Beef Sliders are perfect for busy professionals and food enthusiasts alike. It's the perfect way to use up leftover cooked steak, beef tenderloin, or even deli roast beef meat. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite sauces and greens.

    Holding slider with cooked beef

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • What ingredients do you need?
      • Can you use beef tenderloin?
    • How do you make these roast beef sliders?
      • Optional cooking step
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Making roast beef sliders ahead of time
    • Want more? Try these other party-ready recipes:

    Why you'll love it

    There's something irresistibly satisfying about these sliders. Picture this: succulent beef, melted provolone cheese, and crisp greens, all sandwiched between the sweet Hawaiian rolls. It's truly a flavor explosion in every bite!

    These sliders are incredibly easy to make too. Perfect for lazy lunches, quick dinners, or even a delightful addition to your party menu.

    Slider on a wood platter

    Are roast beef sliders healthy?

    We're all about balance here at Cheerful Choices. So while these sliders are definitely decadent, it's also still a way to reach your protein goals while also sneaking in some greens. For a balanced meal, we recommend serving these slides alongside other nutrient-packed sides like a quinoa salad, veggies and hummus, or roasted squash.

    Beef tenderloin slider

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Hawaiian Rolls: These sweet, soft buns add a delightful contrast to the savory fillings. For a bit of extra fiber, you can also opt for whole grain slider buns.
    • Sauce of Your Choice: Whether it's light mayo, zesty horseradish, or classic gravy, your sauce sets the flavor tone. Opt for low-fat options to keep it healthy.
    • Provolone Cheese: Melted provolone adds a creamy texture that complements the beef's flavor.
    • Cooked Beef: Roast beef slices or any tender cut work wonders. You can prepare these in advance or use leftovers for a quick meal. Here, we're using leftover beef tenderloin. You could also swap for another meat like cooked and sliced turkey or chicken.
    • Leafy Greens: Choose your favorite greens, such as crisp spinach or peppery arugula. These provide a burst of freshness and essential nutrients.

    Can you use beef tenderloin?

    We love using leftover beef tenderloin for this recipe because it's super tender. Beef tenderloin is often served during the holidays but it always makes a HUGE amount. If you have leftovers you're looking to transform, look no further than these sliders!

    Beef tenderloin
    Beef tenderloin

    How do you make these roast beef sliders?

    Whether you're making a tenderloin sandwich or using roast beef, here's how to make it:

    • Slice Slider Buns: Carefully halve the Hawaiian rolls horizontally.
    • Spread the Sauce: On the bottom halves, spread your chosen sauce generously.
    • Add Provolone: Place a folded provolone slice on the sauced buns.
    • Layer the Beef: Add 2 ounces of cooked beef on top of the cheese.
    • Add Greens: Finish with a handful of your selected leafy greens.
    • Top and Secure: Place the other half of the bun on the greens and gently press down. Secure your slider with a toothpick.
    Beef tenderloin sandwich

    Optional cooking step

    If you prefer a warmer slider, we recommend heating it up after preparing it. Here are the two methods to try:

    • Air fry the slider at 350ºF for 4-5 minutes until cheese is melted and meat is warmed through. Keep an eye on this one as the slider bun can quickly go from toasted to burnt.
    • Bake in a toaster oven or regular oven at 350ºF for 8-10 minutes until cheese is melted and meat is warmed through.
    Uncooked slider vs cooked slider
    Uncooked slider vs cooked slider

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair these sliders with a crisp salad, sweet potato fries, or a refreshing fruit platter. 
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your sliders are feeling a bit dry, a drizzle of olive oil on the beef before assembly can add moisture. Too messy? Wrap your sliders in parchment paper for a neater eating experience.
    • Scaling Tips: Easily double or triple the recipe for parties. Hawaiian rolls come in packs of 12 so if you tripled the recipe you'll end up using all 12 buns!

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes here at Cheerful Choices, these sliders are completely customizable. You get to choose what sauce and greens you want to use. Here are some ideas:

    • Sauce of your choice: Light mayo, horseradish, mustard, gravy, barbecue sauce, or a creamy aioli are all welcome here! Feel free to use more than 1 teaspoon per slider if you like things saucier.
    • Greens of your choice: If you're heating up the slider, I recommend using a green that still tastes good when wilted slightly such as spinach, arugula, or kale. Otherwise, you could also use a more delicate green like butter lettuce or romaine leaves.

    Making roast beef sliders ahead of time

    These sliders are incredibly convenient as you can prepare them up to 1 day before your special occasion. If warming them up, wait to cook them until right before serving.

    Holding toasted Roast beef sliders

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store your leftover sliders in an airtight container for 2-3 days in the fridge.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Roast Beef Sliders 2
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Roast Beef Sliders

    This slider is the perfect way to use up leftover cooked steak, beef tenderloin, or even deli roast beef meat. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite sauces and greens.
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Optional Cook Time10 minutes mins
    Course: Appetizer
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 4 sliders
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 4 Hawaiian rolls, sliced in half
    • 4 teaspoons sauce of your choice (light mayo, horseradish, mustard, etc.)
    • 4 slices provolone cheese, folded into quarters
    • 8 ounces cooked and sliced beef (such as leftover cooked steak or deli roast beef cuts)
    • 1 cup leafy greens of your choice (If you're heating up the slider, I recommend using a green that still tastes good when wilted slightly such as spinach, arugula, or kale.)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Spread 1 teaspoon sauce over one side of the slider bun. Then, top with 1 slice provolone cheese, ~2 ounces beef, and a handful of leafy greens per slider.
    • Add over the top slider bun, gently press down with hands, and secure with a toothpick. Repeat with remaining sliders.
    • Store sliders for 2-3 days in the fridge.
    • Optional cooking instructions: Air fry the slider at 350ºF for 4-5 minutes or bake in a toaster oven at 350ºF for 8-10 minutes until cheese is melted and meat is warmed through.

    Video

    save this party slider recipe on pinterest:

    Holding Roast beef sliders

    Want more? Try these other party-ready recipes:

    • Bruschetta Trio
    • Baked Mac and Cheese
    • Goat Cheese Caprese Dip

    Customizable Microwave Chia Seed Jam

    October 27, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

    You won't go back to store bought jam after making this incredibly easy Customizable Chia Seed Jam. This recipe calls for just 2 ingredients and takes less than 5 minutes to make in the microwave. Plus, it's naturally gluten-free, vegan, and has no added sugars! It's a great recipe to make at home to use up any fresh, frozen, or canned fruit on hand.

    Chia jam in a clear bowl

    Table of Contents

    • What is chia seed jam?
    • How to make microwave chia jam
      • First, warm up your fruit
      • Then, stir in your chia seeds
    • What can you use chia jam for?
    • Customize it your way
    • Should I use fresh, frozen, or canned fruit?
    • Does this jam have added sugar?
    • How to store chia jam leftovers
    • How many servings does it make?

    This post was first published on April 8, 2020. It was updated on October 27, 2023 to include new photos and helpful tips.

    What is chia seed jam?

    Chia seed jam is a nutritious spread made by blending fresh fruit with chia seeds. These tiny seeds have a unique natural gelling property that thickens the mixture into a jam-like consistency, eliminating the need for pectin. Chia seed jam is not only delicious but also incredibly healthy.

    Chia seeds provide great fiber, omega-3 fatty acids, and key nutrients like calcium and phosphorus. 

    Chia seeds and berries
    Chia seeds and berries mashed in bowl

    How to make microwave chia jam

    Here's how to make this super easy 2 Ingredient Chia Seed Jam.

    First, warm up your fruit

    You can heat your fruit in the microwave or over the stove. You just need to heat the fruit through enough so that it starts to break down and is easy to mash. Mash the fruit until it is mostly liquid with some fruit chunks left. If you like a smoother jam, you can blend your fruit in a food processor before adding the chia seeds.

    Then, stir in your chia seeds

    When you add the chia seeds in, it will not thicken immediately. It takes about 2 hours or more for the chia seeds to absorb some of the liquid. We recommend letting the jam sit overnight for the best texture. This makes it ideal to meal prep ahead of time!

    This Customizable Chia Seed Jam is a great way to use up any fresh or frozen fruit on hand. This recipe calls for just 2 ingredients and takes less than 5 minutes to make. Plus, it’s naturally gluten-free, vegan, and has no added sugars! #homemadejam #frozenfoods #easyrecipe #2ingredients

    What can you use chia jam for?

    You can use this jam for any recipe you would use regular jam for. I love to spoon this microwave chia jam over yogurt parfaits or overnight oats. It's also great in peanut butter and jelly sandwiches or served on breakfast charcuterie boards.

    When it comes to dessert time, enjoy this jam over ice cream, french toast, or lathered over a slice of banana bread.

    Don't be shy-feel free to enjoy this chia jam alone by the spoonful too. 

    This Customizable Chia Seed Jam is a great way to use up any fresh or frozen fruit on hand. This recipe calls for just 2 ingredients and takes less than 5 minutes to make. Plus, it’s naturally gluten-free, vegan, and has no added sugars! #homemadejam #frozenfoods #easyrecipe #2ingredients

    Customize it your way

    Since this is a "Customizable" Chia Seed Jam, you can use any fruit you like for this recipe. Some of the best fruits for this jam are strawberries, blueberries, raspberries, blackberries, peaches, cherries, and apricots. Try to use soft, ripe fruit as this will break down the easiest. 

    Should I use fresh, frozen, or canned fruit?

    All forms of fruit are packed with great nutrition. For this jam, you can use fresh fruit but I even find that frozen fruit works best because it breaks down easier. Canned fruit tends to work well too, you may just have to mash it a bit more.

    This chia jam is a great way to avoid food waste and throw in any of those bits of fruit that are on their last leg.

    Does this jam have added sugar?

    This jam relies on the natural sugars present in the fruit for its sweetness so there are no added sugars.

    We find that this jam is sweet enough as is. However, sometimes if the fruit you are using is under ripe or not as sweet-you might want to mix in a spoonful of stevia, monk fruit, agave, maple syrup, or honey.

    Mackenzie Burgess, RDN enjoying her chia seed jam recipe
    Chia jam

    How to store chia jam leftovers

    To store leftover chia jam, transfer it into an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks, providing a delicious and healthy spread whenever you need it. You can also freeze this chia jam for up to 6 months. Simply add to a sealed container or ice cube trays to freeze.

    Mason Jar Yogurt Parfait with chia jam

    How many servings does it make?

    This recipe makes 1 cup of chia jam which is generally 1-2 servings. Want more? Simply double or triple this recipe! Trust me, it's that good.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Customizable Chia Seed Jam
    Customizable Chia Jam 2 scaled
    Print Recipe
    4.70 from 10 votes

    Customizable Chia Seed Jam

    This Customizable Chia Seed Jam is a great way to use up any fresh or frozen fruit on hand. This recipe calls for just 2 ingredients and takes only a few minutes to make!
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Total Time5 minutes mins
    Course: Breakfast Choices
    Keyword: 2 ingredients, berries, breakfast, chia jam, easy recipe, jam
    Servings: 1 cup
    Calories: 100kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup frozen or fresh ripened fruit of your choice (strawberries, blueberries, raspberries, blackberries, peaches, cherries, apricots, grapes**, or a combination)
    • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Add fruit into a microwave safe bowl and microwave for 1-2 minutes until fruit is softened and starts to release some of its juices. Alternatively, you can heat fruit in a small saucepan over medium heat for about 10 minutes.
    • After heated, mash fruit with a fork or potato masher until fruit is mostly broken down with some chunks left.
    • Stir in chia seeds and let mixture set in the fridge for 2 hours or overnight. This allows time for the chia seeds to absorb the liquid and thicken into a jam.
    • Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to one week or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

    Video

    Notes

    **If you are using grapes, be sure to heat them in a saucepan rather than in the microwave. (See why here)

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cup | Calories: 100kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 8g

    save this microwavable chia seed jam recipe on pinterest:

    Save this Customizable Chia Seed Jam

    Sheet Pan Turkey Tenderloin

    October 25, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

    This Holiday Turkey Sheet Pan Meal is the perfect hearty meal for the busy season. Simply add nut crusted turkey tenderloin, colorful veggies, and seasonings of your choice to a sheet pan and roast to golden perfection. This stress-free meal can be served as a Thanksgiving main dish or added to your weeknight dinner rotation.

    Turkey Tenderloin 10

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Is turkey tenderloin healthy?
    • This sheet pan meal is ideal for Thanksgiving
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make this sheet pan turkey tenderloin?
      • 1. Preheat and prepare
      • 2. Toss veggies
      • 3. Prepare turkey
      • 4. Rest and slice
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Making this sheet pan turkey ahead of time
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • Want more? Try these other holiday-ready recipes

    Why you'll love it

    Here's what you're about to dive into: a mouthwatering lean turkey perfectly cooked with a honey dijon herb and nut crust. Then, on the other side of the pan, an assortment of potatoes, vibrant red bell peppers, and tender broccoli, all roasted to golden perfection.

    The best part? It's all done on one sheet pan! This recipe is a game-changer for busy folks who are looking for a wholesome, holiday meal without spending hours in the kitchen.

    Turkey Tenderloin 9

    What is turkey tenderloin?

    Turkey tenderloin is a boneless and skinless cut from the breast of the turkey, known for its tenderness and leanness. In our holiday inspired sheet pan meal, it serves as the star ingredient, providing a juicy and protein-packed element. Plus, turkey tenderloin is much smaller than a whole turkey so it cooks up in no time.

    Is turkey tenderloin healthy?

    Absolutely! Turkey tenderloin is high in lean protein and low in fat with only 1 gram of total fat per serving. It's also a great source of nutrients like vitamin B6 which is important for brain function; and selenium which is an essential component of proteins and enzymes.

    Turkey Tenderloin 14

    This sheet pan meal is ideal for Thanksgiving

    Planning the perfect Thanksgiving or holiday feast just got easier with this turkey sheet pan meal. This one-pan wonder not only simplifies your holiday cooking but also ensures a moist and flavorful turkey without the hassle.

    Impressive entree with minimal effort is what this turkey tenderloin is all about. And I know what you're thinking: It's the holidays, shouldn't I spend most of the day cooking?

    Nah! A quicker entree like this one means you can spend less time in the kitchen and more time enjoying the festivities-a true holiday lifesaver! 

    Turkey Tenderloin 1
    Turkey Tenderloin 2

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Turkey Breast Tenderloin: This can be a bit tricky to find sometimes. I recommend doing a quick Google search or call your local butcher to see who might have it near you. Once in the store, look for this in the poultry section. 
    • Baby Gold Potatoes: These small potatoes are creamy inside and roast beautifully, providing the ultimate comfort. Be sure to cut them into pretty small pieces so they roast all the way through.
    • Red Bell Pepper: Choose a vibrant, firm pepper for a burst of color and a hint of sweetness. You could also swap for a orange or yellow pepper.
    • Broccoli: To save time, opt for pre-cut florets in store. It adds a delightful crunch to your meal.
    • Dijon Mustard: This adds a zesty kick to your turkey and helps create a flavorful crust during roasting.
    • Honey: A natural sweetener that balances the flavors and gives the turkey a golden, caramelized finish.
    • Rosemary: Fresh rosemary elevates the dish with its fragrant aroma and earthy flavor. Save some to garnish with for that extra wow factor.
    • Chopped Nuts: These add a delightful crunch and healthy fats to the top of the turkey.
    Turkey Tenderloin

    How do you make this sheet pan turkey tenderloin?

    Let's break down the steps to create this delectable holiday sheet pan meal.

    1. Preheat and prepare

    Preheat your oven to 425°F and line a large sheet pan with parchment paper.

    Turkey Tenderloin 3

    2. Toss veggies

    Toss the baby gold potatoes, red bell pepper, and broccoli with oil, seasoning, salt, and pepper. Spread them on one side of the pan. If you want to skip extra dishes, you can mix the veggies with the oil and seasonings right there on the sheet pan.

    Also, if one large sheet pan isn't big enough to fit all ingredients in a single, use two sheet pans: one sheet pan for the turkey and one sheet pan for the veggies.

    Turkey Tenderloin 4
    Turkey Tenderloin 5

    3. Prepare turkey

    Pat the turkey tenderloin dry and place it on the other side of the pan. Spread the dijon mustard, honey, rosemary, chopped nuts, salt, and pepper mixture over the turkey. Then, roast away!

    Ideally if you have a wired probe thermometer, insert this into the turkey before adding it to the oven so you can achieve the perfect temperature. If you want to go by the book, cooking to 165ºF is the food safe temperature for poultry.

    However, here's a quick tip for juicier turkey: pull the turkey out of the oven at 160ºF. Then, when you let it rest over foil for 5-10 minutes, it will come up to 165ºF with carry over cooking.

    Turkey Tenderloin 13

    4. Rest and slice

    Let the pan rest under foil for 5 minutes, allowing the juices to redistribute for moist turkey. Then, slice the turkey and serve!

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Pair this delightful meal with a side salad, rice, or enjoy it on its own. Feeling saucy? Try it with a drizzle of Honey Garlic Butter or a dollop of ketchup. 
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If you're doubling or tripling the recipe, use multiple sheet pans for even cooking. Be mindful of cook times as they might vary.
    • Scaling Tips: Doubling or tripling? Adjust the ingredients accordingly, keeping the ratios intact. This ensures your dish is perfectly seasoned and cooked.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this turkey tenderloin sheet pan meal is completely customizable. You get to choose what seasonings and nuts you want to use.

    • Seasonings: Experiment seasoning the veggies with different spices like garlic powder or smoked paprika. You can even use premade seasoning blends like Cajun seasoning, lemon pepper, or everything bagel seasoning.
    • Nuts: This recipe is similar to my nut crusted salmon because you can use any nuts you enjoy best. Try chopped/sliced almonds, pecans, walnuts, or pistachios. 
    Turkey Tenderloin 8

    Making this sheet pan turkey ahead of time

    You can prep the veggies and the turkey mixture a day in advance and store them separately in the fridge. When you're ready to cook, simply assemble everything on the sheet pan and pop it in the oven. Easy peasy!

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. If you want to freeze some portions, ensure they're tightly sealed and enjoy within a month. To reheat, a few minutes in the oven or a quick zap in the microwave should do the trick. Just note, it may become a bit more dry when you microwave than when you first serve it.

    Turkey Tenderloin 6

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Turkey Tenderloin 10
    Print Recipe
    5 from 5 votes

    Sheet Pan Turkey Tenderloin

    This stress-free meal can be served as a Thanksgiving main dish or added to your weeknight dinner rotation. Simply add crusted turkey breast tenderloin and colorful veggies of your choice to a sheet pan and roast to golden perfection.
    Prep Time15 minutes mins
    Cook Time30 minutes mins
    Total Time45 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: holiday
    Servings: 6 servings
    Calories: 330kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Wired Temperature Probe

    Ingredients

    Vegetable Ingredients:

    • 1 pound baby gold potatoes, quartered into small ½ inch pieces
    • 1 medium red bell pepper, cut into 1-inch cubes
    • 1 medium head of broccoli, cut into 1-inch florets (about 3 cups florets)
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
    • 1 tablespoon seasoning blend of your choice (Italian seasoning, lemon pepper, blackening seasoning, garlic powder, etc.)
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

    Turkey Ingredients:

    • 1 package, about 24 ounces turkey breast tenderloin
    • 2 tablespoons dijon mustard
    • 2 tablespoons honey
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped rosemary
    • ½ cup chopped nuts of your choice (almonds, pecans, walnuts, etc.)
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 425°F. Line a large 18"x13" sheet pan with parchment paper.
    • Vegetables: In a large bowl, combine potatoes, red pepper, and broccoli with oil, seasoning, salt. and pepper. Use tongs to toss until coated then add to the right side of the sheet pan.
    • Turkey: Add turkey tenderloin to the left side of the prepared sheet pan and pat dry with a paper towel. In a small bowl, mix together the dijon mustard, honey, rosemary, chopped nuts, salt, and pepper. Spoon this mixture over the turkey, being careful to not let it spill over the sides.
    • Bake everything for about 25-30 minutes or until the turkey is cooked through to an internal temperature of 165ºF and the potatoes are tender and golden brown. Be sure to toss the vegetables with tongs halfway through cooking for even browning.
    • Once done baking, remove pan from the oven, let rest under foil for 5 minutes to let the juices redistribute. Then, slice the turkey and serve.

    Video

    Notes

    Sheet Pan Note: If one large sheet pan isn't big enough to fit all ingredients in a single, use two sheet pans (One for the turkey, and one for the veggies).
    Temperature Note: It can be helpful to use a temperature probe that goes into the turkey and monitors the temperature as it bakes. For juicier turkey, you can also pull it out of the oven at 160ºF and let it rest under foil until it comes up to 165ºF with carry over cooking.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 330kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 1000mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 11g

    save this sheet pan turkey tenderloin recipe on pinterest:

    Turkey Tenderloin Pinterest Regular Pins

    Want more? Try these other holiday-ready recipes

    • Lamb Meatballs with Tzatziki
    • Nut Crusted Salmon
    • Baked Barramundi Skillet Recipe
    • Air Fryer Green Beans
    • Roasted Fall Vegetables with Smoked Paprika Aioli

    Sushi Cups

    October 18, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 16 Comments

    Sushi cups are perfect to have out as an appetizer or serve as a unique snack. They call for your favorite veggies, creamy avocado, and a drizzle of spicy mayo, all nestled in a springy rice cup. No baking involved!

    Grabbing sushi bite from tray

    (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • What is "mukimame"?
    • How do you make sushi cups?
      • 1. Cook the rice 
      • 2. Press into cups
      • 3. Prepare veggies
      • 4. Assemble
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I make sushi cups ahead of time?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
      • save this easy sushi recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more? Try these other recipes with rice:

    Why you'll love it

    Imagine the goodness of sushi, but without the fuss of rolling it. These sushi cups are like bite-sized pockets of happiness. They're not just tasty; they're incredibly versatile, making them perfect for parties, quick lunches, or even a fancy dinner appetizer. And guess what? They are a breeze to make!

    Are sushi cups healthy?

    These sushi bites call for simple ingredients with vibrant veggies. Here's why they're a nourishing option.

    • Rice - Provides carbohydrates, our body's main source of energy.
    • Veggies - Packed with vitamins, minerals, and fiber for a healthy gut.
    • Avocado - Rich in healthy fats and potassium
    • Edamame - High in protein and fiber, keeping you full and satisfied.
    • Spicy Mayo - A light drizzle to add flavor without piling on calories.
    Sushi cups on wooden tray

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Sushi Rice - Choose a short-grain sushi rice. It's sticky and idea for shaping into cups.
    • Veggies - Fresh and crunchy, they add texture and nutrients.
    • Steamed Mukimame - You can find this in the frozen section.
    • Avocado - Creamy and nutritious, it adds a lovely richness.
    • Soy Sauce - For that umami flavor 
    • Mayonnaise - The base for our spicy mayo, use light mayo for a healthier twist.
    • Sriracha Sauce - Adds a spicy kick, adjust according to your heat preference.
    • Honey - For a touch of sweetness in your spicy mayo.
    • Sesame Oil - A small amount goes a long way, enhancing the overall flavor.
    • Black Sesame Seeds - For a sprinkle of color and a nutty taste.
    Sushi cups on wooden tray with edamame

    What is "mukimame"?

    Mukimame is simply shelled edamame. I like buying it pre-shelled because it makes for less prep work. You'll find it in the frozen section next to edamame. If you can't find it, you can buy regular edamame pods. When ~15 edamame pods are shelled, you'll get the ¼ cup mukimame (shelled edamame) needed for the recipe. 

    How do you make sushi cups?

    These sushi cups come together in no time. Here's how to make them with no baking involved!

    1. Cook the rice 

    Simmer rice with water until tender. Be sure to rinse rice well.

    Cooking sushi rice in a pan

    2. Press into cups

    Use a spoon or tablespoon to press into the cups. I recommend using silicone muffin liners if you have them.

    Sushi rice cups
    Rice cups

    3. Prepare veggies

    Combine chopped veggies, steamed edamame, and diced avocado with sauce of choice.

    Mixing veggies together in bowl

    4. Assemble

    Spoon veggie mix over rice cups, drizzle with spicy mayo, and sprinkle black sesame seeds.

    Sushi cups on wooden tray
    Sushi cups on wooden tray with spicy mayo drizzled over

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: You can pair sushi cups pickled ginger or wasabi just like normal sushi. Green tea or sake complements the flavors perfectly too.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If the rice is too sticky, wet your spoon while shaping the cups to prevent sticking. 
    • Scaling Tips: You can easily double the recipe for parties. You'll just need 2 muffin pans.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, these sushi cups are completely customizable. You get to choose what veggies and sauce you want to use. 

    • Veggies of your choice - Use veggies that can be eaten raw such as carrots, cucumber, bell peppers, or sprouts.
    • Sauce of your choice - Use soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos depending on what you already enjoy or your dietary preferences. Tamari and coconut aminos are both gluten-free. Feel free to experiment with different sauces too, like teriyaki or ponzu.
    Sushi Cups with spicy mayo

    Can I make sushi cups ahead of time?

    Absolutely! You can prep the sushi cups 24 hours in advance and store them in an airtight container. They are best enjoyed within 2 days otherwise the rice can start to get a bit stale.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Sushi Cups 6
    Print Recipe
    4.88 from 8 votes

    Sushi Cups

    Sushi cups are the perfect bite-sized appetizer or snack. Customize with any veggies of your choice!
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Cook Time20 minutes mins
    Total Time40 minutes mins
    Course: Appetizer
    Cuisine: Asian
    Keyword: no bake
    Servings: 12 sushi cups
    Calories: 110kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Silicone Baking Cups

    Ingredients

    Sushi Ingredients:

    • 1 cup sushi rice, rinsed
    • 1 ½ cups water
    • ½ cup finely chopped veggies of your choice (Use veggies that can be eaten raw such as carrots, cucumber, bell peppers, or sprouts)
    • ¼ cup steamed mukimame (aka shelled edamame)
    • ¼ cup diced avocado (~½ small avocado)
    • 1 tablespoon sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)

    Spicy Mayo Ingredients:

    • ¼ cup mayonnaise
    • 1 teaspoon Sriracha sauce, adjust to taste
    • 1 teaspoon coconut aminos or soy sauce
    • 1 teaspoon honey
    • ½ teaspoon sesame oil
    • Black sesame seeds, for garnish
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • In a medium pot, combine rinsed rice and water. Bring to a boil over high heat. Reduce the heat to low, cover, and simmer for 20 minutes or until the rice is cooked and water is absorbed. Remove from heat and let it cool slightly.
    • Press about 2 heaping tablespoons of cooked rice into each cup of a muffin tin. Press down to compact the rice. Place the muffin tin in the fridge and chill for 20 minutes, allowing the rice to set.*
    • In a mixing bowl, combine chopped veggies, steamed edamame, diced avocado, and coconut aminos or soy sauce. Mix well to combine the flavors.
    • In another bowl, whisk together all mayo ingredients. Adjust the Sriracha sauce to your desired level of spiciness.
    • Remove the rice cups from the fridge. Spoon a heaping tablespoon of the veggie filling over each rice cup. Drizzle spicy mayo over the top of the veggies and garnish with black sesame seeds.

    Video

    https://www.instagram.com/p/CxtQ4QgPsMH/

    Notes

    *Prep Note: While the rice is in the fridge, prep the veggies and the mayo in Step 3 and 4.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1sushi cup | Calories: 110kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 80mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g

    save this easy sushi recipe on pinterest:

    Sushi Cups with spicy mayo

    Want more? Try these other recipes with rice:

    • Thai Peanut Rice Bowl
    • Instant Pot Chicken and Rice Soup
    • One Pot Brown Rice Jambalaya

    Baked Barramundi Skillet Recipe

    October 11, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    This Baked Barramundi recipe is the perfect one-pan recipe for a quick weeknight dinner or dinner party. Flaky Barramundi fish is paired with roasted cauliflower, seasonal squash, and a creamy tahini sauce that's divine.  Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite spices and veggies.

    Baked Barramundi in one skillet

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by the Aquaculture Stewardship Council. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Is Barramundi sustainable?
    • Is Barramundi healthy?
    • What ingredients do you need?
    • How do you make this Barramundi recipe?
      • 1. Preheat oven and mix
      • 2. Roast everything
      • 3. Drizzle in tahini
      • 4. Garnish and serve
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can you make this skillet ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftovers?
    • What to do with leftover chickpeas
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      Why you'll love it

      This one pan recipe is a triple threat: it's delicious, healthy, and easy to make! 

      • Super Flavorful: The Barramundi fillets are flaky and tender, while the roasted veggies add a nice crunch. Finally, the tahini sauce adds a velvety texture that ties everything together.
      • Easy Elegance: Impress your guests or simply treat yourself to a gourmet weeknight meal without spending hours in the kitchen. It may seem like a long list of instructions but it's surprisingly simple to make!
      • Nutrient-Packed: The fish delivers healthy fats while the veggies and chickpeas provide vitamins, fiber, and plant-based protein, making this dish a nutritional powerhouse.

      What is Barramundi?

      The Better Fish® Barramundi is a white fish with a mild, sweet, and buttery flavor. I have it all the time over power bowls, fish tacos, or this skillet.

      Barramundi recipe on a plate

      Is Barramundi sustainable?

      Sustainability is very important to me when making food choices. That's why I recommend purchasing Barramundi that's certified as responsibly raised by the Aquaculture Stewardship Council (ASC). That sea green label on the bottom left corner means farms adhere to ASC's strict guidelines that help ensure the fish was raised in a responsible way, is traceable, and that growers care for the natural environment and support local communities. 

      This Barramundi by The Better Fish® is unique because it's transported by sea instead of airplane, which emits 90% less carbon and reduces food waste.

      The Better Fish® Barramundi is also farmed by ASC-Certified producer Australis Aquaculture at just one location. This makes for a consistent taste and sustainable seafood experience.

      Read more about their commitment to sustainability here.

      Barramundi bag
      Barramundi bag

      Is Barramundi healthy?

      As a dietitian, Barramundi is what I call a "superstar" in the seafood world. It's packed with heart-healthy omega-3s and complete protein while remaining low in calories and saturated fat. In fact, it actually has the highest omegas of any white fish (ALA, EPA, and DHA)! 

      Omega-3s can help support heart health and brain health.

      Research has consistently shown that a diet rich in omega-3 fatty acids, such as those found in Barramundi, may lower the risk of heart disease by reducing cholesterol, triglycerides, and blood pressure.

      Additionally, these essential fatty acids are known to play a crucial role in brain development and function, potentially reducing the risk of cognitive decline and disorders like dementia. 

      Barramundi bag next to skillet fillet

      What ingredients do you need?

      • Barramundi: You can find  Better Fish® Barramundi in the frozen section of your grocery store or you can stock up at Costco with their 2 pound pack.
      • Cauliflower: Head to the produce aisle for pre-chopped fresh cauliflower florets or pick up a whole cauliflower and chop it up yourself!
      • Squash or Sweet Potato: Hit the farmers' market for great seasonal squash options. You could also use sweet potatoes! There's sometimes even pre-chopped options in the produce section of your local grocery store. If you're cutting it yourself, check out this guide.
      • Chickpeas: Canned chickpeas are a pantry staple. Simply drain and rinse them before using.
      • Olive Oil: A good quality olive oil adds flavor and helps roast your veggies to perfection.
      • Spices: Get creative with your spice blend! Try Mediterranean classics like cumin and paprika or use a pre-made seasoning like za'atar.
      • Tahini: Available in most grocery stores, tahini is usually found in the international foods section. You can even buy it online.
      • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice brings that zesty kick to your tahini sauce.
      • Garlic: You can either pick up fresh garlic or pre-minced garlic jars in the produce section. I typically recommend fresh but the jars are nice for time-savings!
      • Fresh Herbs: I like to sprinkle on fresh herbs, such as cilantro, at the end for that final hit of herbaceous flavor.
      Ingredients on a white marble backdrop

      How do you make this Barramundi recipe?

      This Baked Barramundi recipe comes together in just one hour, here's how to make it:

      1. Preheat oven and mix

      Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Toss cauliflower, squash, and chickpeas with olive oil and spices. Make sure the squash are chopped into ½-inch cubes so they'll roast all the way through. If they are too big, they may end up being undercooked.

      Tossing together vegetables in a skillet
      Baking vegetables in a skillet

      2. Roast everything

      Roast those veggies for 25 minutes until they're golden and tender. Then, add Barramundi fillets and season. I often like to use my hands here to pat down the oil and spices on top. Bake for an additional 15 minutes.

      Fish fillet over skillet
      Fish fillet seasoned
      Baked Barramundi

      3. Drizzle in tahini

      While everything's baking, stir up the tahini sauce. Then, drizzle it over the dish and bake for an extra 5 minutes until it's slightly bubbly.

      Pouring tahini sauce over fish

      4. Garnish and serve

      Finish it all off with fresh herbs, and serve straight from the pan!

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Optional Toppings: Since this recipe really leans into the Mediterranean flavors, you could add over other fresh topping such as avocado slices, pickled red onion, or even more lemon juice for extra acidity. 
      • Serving Tips: This skillet has a great balance of carbs, protein, and healthy fats so it can pretty much standalone for a full meal. However, you could also consider pairing it with a fresh salad or steamed rice.
      • Scaling Tips: You can definitely double this recipe for larger gatherings. However, in this case, I'd recommend turning it into one large sheet pan meal instead of a skillet.
      Barramundi Skillet served on a plate

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this Baked Barramundi is completely customizable. You get to choose what spices and veggies "of your choice" you want to use. 

      • Squash of your choice: Fall is the perfect time to experiment with different types of squash. Feel free to use a classic butternut squash or mix it up and try acorn, delicata, sugar pumpkin, or kabocha squash. I've even tested this with sweet potato and it turns out great. Just make sure all squash pieces are cut into similar ½-inch pieces so it cooks evenly.
      • Spices of your choice: Pictured here I used a pre-made seasoning called Za'atar. However, you can also get creative and use any mixture of Mediterranean spices like garlic powder, cumin, paprika, or coriander. Combine them until you reach a total of 2 tablespoons needed for this recipe.

      Can you make this skillet ahead of time?

      Somewhat! You can cut the veggies and tahini sauce in advance, then assemble and bake when you're ready.

      Taking spoonful of skillet

      How do I store leftovers?

      This skillet is best enjoyed right away but you can store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge. Don't attempt to freeze this one.

      What to do with leftover chickpeas

      For this recipe, you'll end up with about ½ cup extra canned chickpeas. You can store them in an airtight container in the fridge until you're ready to use. They'll stay fresh in the fridge for about 3-4 days.

      Try tossing them in colorful salads, roast them in the air fryer for a crispy snack, or blend them into a creamy hummus. They'll stay fresh in the fridge for about 3-4 days.

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Baked Barramundi Recipe square
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Baked Barramundi Recipe - One Skillet with Roasted Vegetables and Tahini Sauce

      This Barramundi Skillet is the perfect one pan recipe for a quick weeknight dinner or holiday parties. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite spices and seasonal squash.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time45 minutes mins
      Total Time1 hour hr
      Course: Main Dish Choices
      Cuisine: Mediterranean
      Keyword: barramundi recipe
      Servings: 4 servings
      Calories: 400kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      Skillet Ingredients:

      • 3 cups cauliflower florets (about ½ cauliflower head)
      • 2 cups winter squash of your choice or sweet potato (about 2 pound squash), diced into ½-inch cubes (Squash varieties you could choose include acorn, butternut, delicata, sugar pumpkin, or kabocha squash)
      • 1 cup (about ⅔ can) canned chickpeas, drained and rinsed
      • 3 tablespoons olive oil
      • 2 tablespoons spices of your choice, divided (Feel free to use a pre-made seasoning like Za'atar or a mixture of Mediterranean spices like garlic powder, cumin, paprika, coriander, etc.)
      • 4 4 ounce Barramundi fillets, thawed overnight or in cold water for 20 minutes
      • Salt and pepper, to taste

      Tahini Sauce Ingredients:

      • ¼ cup tahini
      • 5 tablespoons water, plus more as needed
      • 3 tablespoons lemon juice (about 1 large lemon)
      • 1 tablespoon garlic, minced (about 3 garlic cloves)
      • Salt and pepper, to taste

      For Garnish:

      • ¼ cup (or ~¼ bunch) fresh herbs of your choice (parsley, cilantro, etc.)
      • Lemon wedges, for squeezing
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C).
      • In a large cast iron skillet or oven safe pan, combine the cauliflower florets, diced squash or sweet potato, and chickpeas. Drizzle with olive oil, 1 tablespoon of the spices, and salt and pepper to taste. Use tongs to toss to coat evenly.
      • Place the skillet in the preheated oven and roast the vegetables and chickpeas for about 25 minutes or until they are slightly golden and tender.
      • Toss veggies once more then place Barramundi fillets on top of the roasted veggies. Sprinkle fillets evenly with the remaining 1 tablespoon of olive oil and remaining 1 tablespoon of spices.
      • Return the skillet to the oven and bake for an additional 15 minutes.
      • While everything is roasting, prepare the tahini sauce by whisking together all ingredients in a mason jar or liquid measuring cup. Add more water as needed to reach a pourable consistency.
      • Briefly remove the skillet from the oven. Drizzle over tahini sauce and bake for 5 more minutes, until the skillet is bubbly and fish easily flakes with a fork.
      • Before serving, top with fresh herbs and squeeze over lemon wedges, if desired. 

      Video

      https://www.instagram.com/p/CyWISxaLhIq/

      Notes

      Storage Note: This skillet is best enjoyed right away but you can store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 4servings | Calories: 400kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 270mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 6g

      save this baked barramundi skillet recipe on pinterest:

      One Skillet Meal with Barramundi recipe

      Want more? Try these other one pan, one pot recipes:

      • One Pot Tomato Basil Pasta
      • Customizable Chili
      • Shrimp Skillet

      Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl

      October 3, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      This Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl recipe is a game-changer for looking for a quick weeknight meal packed with flavor and nutrition. This customizable bowl features a base of cauliflower rice topped with any protein and colorful veggies of your choice. Plus, you only need one cooking pan for easy clean up.

      Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowls with tofu or shrimp

      (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love it
      • Is this protein bowl healthy?
      • Ingredients you'll need:
      • How do you make this cauliflower rice protein bowl?
        • 1. Cooking chicken
        • 2. Cooking shrimp
        • 3. Cooking tofu
        • 4. Cooking canned beans
        • 4. Other protein options
        • Cook cauliflower rice and veggies
      • Tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
        • Protein of your choice
        • Sauce of your choice
        • Veggies of your choice
      • Can I make this protein bowl ahead of time? 
      • How do I store leftovers? 
      • Want other riced cauliflower recipes? Try these:

      Why you'll love it

      Every time we've tested this Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl, we've come to the same conclusion. It's super easy and always tastes delicious.

      Plus, it's a perfect recipe if you're looking to skip a grocery run and use up what you have on hand. You get to use your choice of protein (shrimp, chicken, tofu, black beans, chickpeas, etc.), and any of your favorite veggies on hand. That's right - show those veggies sitting in the back of your fridge some love. 😉

      Plus, with these options to customize, you can tailor this bowl to your unique taste preferences and dietary needs. Check out my customizable protein bowl template too.

      Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl 16
      Shrimp protein bowl

      Is this protein bowl healthy?

      This Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl is packed with nutrients! Cauliflower is low in calories but filled with fiber, vitamin C and folate, making it an fun alternative to traditional rice every so often. 

      The protein of your choice supports our muscles, while the colorful array of vegetables provides essential vitamins and minerals to keep our bodies healthy.

      The dish is finished off with healthy fats and vitamin E from the avocado slices. The monounsaturated fats found in avocados help support healthy cholesterol levels which can lower your risk of heart disease.

      Two Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowls

      Ingredients you'll need:

      • Cauliflower - This versatile vegetable is the star of the show, offering a low-carb alternative to traditional rice. You can find fresh cauliflower in the produce section of your local grocery store, or save time with pre-chopped cauliflower rice available in the frozen food aisle.
      • Protein - Pick your favorite protein to add a satisfying and protein-packed element to the bowl. For meat options, look for fresh or frozen varieties in the meat or seafood section. For plant-based options like tofu or black beans, check the canned goods or refrigerated tofu section.
      • Lime Juice - This zesty ingredient brings a burst of citrus flavor to the dish. Freshly squeezed lime juice offers the best taste, so grab a couple of juicy limes from the produce section.
      • Sauce - A umami-rich sauce enhances the overall savory taste. You can find soy sauce or gluten-free tamari in the Asian foods section of most grocery stores. We've also been enjoying using coconut aminos which is gluten-free and flower in sodium than most options.
      • Vegetables - Customize your bowl with a colorful array of extra vegetables. Don't hesitate to mix and match to your heart's content!
      • Cilantro - This fresh herb adds a pop of flavor and a delightful fragrance to the bowl. Find fresh cilantro near other fresh herbs in the produce section. You can even use a sprinkle of dried cilantro if you don't have fresh.
      • Avocado - Creamy and nutritious, avocado makes a fantastic topping. Look for ripe avocados that have a slightly softness when given gentle pressure.

      How do you make this cauliflower rice protein bowl?

      This cauliflower bowl is broken up into different steps, but comes together in no time. The main thing to pay attention to is the cooking time of various protein options you might use. Here we'll break down how you can cook each protein in a skillet over the stove top.

      1. Cooking chicken

      When cooking chicken, it's important to ensure it reaches 165ºF. You could also cut down on the cooking time by using pre-cooked chicken in the deli section. Either way, make sure to cut the chicken into small 1-inch cubes before cooking in a pan. 

      Cooked chicken: Cook for 3-4 minutes to warm up

      Uncooked (raw) chicken: Cook for ~6-7 minutes per side 

      Chicken
      Cooking chicken

      2. Cooking shrimp

      Shrimp cooks in a skillet very quickly so keep an eye on it to avoid overcooking. You could also use pre-cooked shrimp here.

      Cooked shrimp: Cook for 2 minutes to warm up

      Uncooked shrimp: Cook for 3-4 minutes

      Shrimp
      Cooking shrimp

      3. Cooking tofu

      I love using tofu in everything from tofu tacos to power bowls. You can buy it in bulk or just one package. Be sure to read this guide on how to press tofu before beginning. For this recipe, I like using my hands to crumble them up into pieces before cooking.

      Pressed and crumbled tofu: Cook for 6-8 minutes

      Tofu
      Cooking tofu

      4. Cooking canned beans

      Having canned beans in your pantry is a great way to have a protein-packed staple at the ready. You can use any type of canned bean such as black beans, garbanzo beans, or white beans. Cooking is optional, but it's nice to warm it up.

      Canned beans: Cook for 2 minutes to warm up in the skillet

      Beans

      4. Other protein options

      You might choose to use another protein option such as ground beef, plant-based meat, edamame, eggs, or others. Look up a simple guide to cooking these in a skillet, then feel free to use it in Step 2 of this recipe. 

      Cook cauliflower rice and veggies

      After you've cooked your protein, add it alongside the browned cauliflower rice and veggies. You can do this in the same pan you cooked your protein in to save on dishes!

      Cooking cauliflower rice
      Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl 10

      Tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: This Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl is delicious on its own, but you can also serve it with a dollop of Greek yogurt or a drizzle of hot sauce for added creaminess or heat. We also often like to serve with tortilla chips for extra crunch!
      • Troubleshooting Tips: If you're finding yourself in need of more flavor add the end, feel free to add an extra splash of soy sauce or season with salt and pepper.
      • Scaling Tips: Feel free to double or triple the ingredient quantities based on your desired serving size.

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this cauliflower bowl is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein, sauce, and veggies you want to use.

      Protein of your choice

      Here are some popular options for these bowls. See cooking instructions for these options above!

      • Chicken 
      • Shrimp
      • Tofu
      • Canned beans

      Sauce of your choice

      There are 4 different types of umami based sauces that work well for this recipe:

      • Soy sauce or low sodium version (contains gluten and soy)
      • Tamari (gluten-free)
      • Coconut aminos (gluten-free and soy-free)
      • Yondu Vegetable Umami (gluten-free)
      Crumbled tofu in a bowl

      Veggies of your choice

      Along with the cauliflower, feel free to saute any additional quick-cooking veggies of your choice. Here are some ideas that pair well with the southwest flavors:

      • Bell peppers
      • Zucchini
      • Yellow squash
      • Corn
      • Kale
      • Tomatoes
      Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowls on white backdrop

      Can I make this protein bowl ahead of time? 

      Absolutely! Feel free to cook up this recipe and then divide the components among 4 meal prep containers to enjoy throughout the week. 

      How do I store leftovers? 

      Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, reheat in the microwave for about 2 minutes until warmed through.

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl Feature scaled
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl

      This customizable bowl features a base of cauliflower rice topped with any protein and colorful veggies of your choice. Plus, you only need one cooking pan for easy clean up.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time15 minutes mins
      Total Time25 minutes mins
      Course: Main Dish Choices
      Cuisine: Mexican
      Keyword: protein bowl
      Servings: 4 servings
      Calories: 380kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      • 14 to 16 ounces protein of your choice (shrimp, chicken, pressed and crumbled tofu, canned and drained black beans, chickpeas, etc.)
      • 1 teaspoon chili powder
      • 1 teaspoon cumin
      • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
      • 1 teaspoon onion powder
      • 2 tablespoons lime juice or about 1 lime, juiced - divided
      • 2 tablespoons sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos) - divided
      • 2 tablespoons avocado oil - divided
      • 3 cups fresh or frozen cauliflower rice* I typically use 1 -10 ounce bag
      • 3 cups vegetables of your choice, diced (peppers, zucchini, yellow squash, corn, kale, tomatoes, etc.)

      Garnish:

      • 4 tablespoons finely chopped cilantro or 1 tablespoon dried cilantro
      • 1 large ripe avocado, sliced
      • Lime wedges, for garnishing
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • In a large bowl combine protein, chili powder, cumin, garlic powder, onion powder, 1 tablespoon of the lime juice, and 1 tablespoon of the soy sauce. Mix until protein is fully coated with spices. 
      • Heat 1 tablespoon of the oil in a large pan to medium-high heat. Add protein to the pan and fully cook through.** Once the protein is cooked, transfer to a bowl covered with foil and set aside to stay warm.
      • To the same pan over medium-high heat, add 1 tablespoon of olive oil. Add the cauliflower rice and cook for about 5 to 6 minutes, stirring only occasionally, until the cauliflower is slightly crispy on the outside. 
      • Then to the cauliflower rice pan, add over vegetables of choice, remaining 1 tablespoon lime juice, and remaining 1 tablespoon soy sauce. Stir and sauté mixture for 3-4 minutes, until warmed through.
      • Once everything is cooked, distribute cauliflower veggie mixture among 4 serving bowls and top with the protein. Evenly garnish with cilantro, avocado, and lime.

      Video

      Notes

      *Cauliflower Rice Note: You can also make your own cauliflower rice by taking ~1 small head cauliflower (or ½ large head) and roughly chop into florets. Then, add this cauliflower into food processor and pulse until it's small and has the texture of rice.
      **Cooking Note: See the blog post above for specific cooking instructions for all protein options. Here is a general timing guideline:
      • Cooked chicken: Cook for 3-4 minutes to warm up
      • Uncooked chicken: Cook for ~6-7 minutes per side
      • Cooked shrimp: Cook for 2 minutes to warm up
      • Uncooked shrimp: Cook for 3-4 minutes
      • Pressed and crumbled tofu: Cook for 6-8 minutes
      • Canned beans: Cook for 2 minutes to warm up
      • Cooking another type of protein? Look up a basic cooking guide before adding into Step #2.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1serving | Calories: 380kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 39g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 100mg | Sodium: 270mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 8g

      save this customizable protein bowl recipe on pinterest:

      Protein bowls recipe

      Want other riced cauliflower recipes? Try these:

      • Cauliflower Rice Risotto with Mushrooms
      • Baked Mac And Cheese Bites
      • Sheet Pan Cauliflower Fried Rice

      Air Fryer Egg Bites

      September 25, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      These air fryer egg bites are perfect to take on-the-go or add to your weekend brunch board. They only take 20 minutes to make and pack in satisfying protein to power your day! Plus, you get to customize them with any veggies of your choice.

      Egg bites in air fryer basket

      Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by The American Egg Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • What are egg bites? 
      • Are egg bites nutritious?
      • Can eggs be part of a heart healthy?
      • How to make air fryer egg bites
        • Ingredients you'll need
        • What seasonings do you need?
        • 1. Mix ingredients
        • 2. Add to liners
        • 3. Place in air fryer and cook
        • 4. Add toppings
      • Tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • What if I don't have an air fryer?
      • Can I make them ahead of time?
        • save this egg bites recipe on pinterest:
      • Want more? Try these other egg-forward recipes:
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      What are egg bites? 

      Egg bites are a savory morsel made of eggs, cheese, and veggies-resembling muffins. They're often served at coffee shops or can be found in the store. Here we are making them homemade by whisking together simple ingredients and cooking in muffin liners. Oftentimes egg bites are baked in the oven, but for this recipe we are cooking them in the air fryer to cut time and provide for extra flavor.

      Egg bites on a white plate with avocado and green onions

      Why you'll love it

      This egg bites recipe is a versatile meal or snack option. We love how they're easy to make, packed with nutrients, and incredibly customizable. Making them in the air fryer gives you a golden brown top. Plus, air fryer egg bites are perfect for summertime so you don't have to heat up your oven.

      If you don't have an air fryer, you can also microwave them one-by-one for 60 seconds in a small mason jar. See the recipe card for the full instructions.

      You can even meal prep these egg bites ahead of time and store them in the fridge or freezer. If freezing, add them to an airtight bag or container and freeze for up to 3 months. Then, simply thaw the night before and reheat in the microwave when ready to enjoy.

      Whether you need a quick grab-and-go breakfast or a weekend brunch recipe, these egg bites have got you covered.

      Grabbing air fryer egg bite

      Are egg bites nutritious?

      These bites feature eggs as the star of the show! Eggs are a nutritional powerhouse with 6 grams of complete protein in just one large egg. Along with high quality protein, eggs also provide essential vitamins and minerals for healthy living. Learn more about the health benefits of eggs on my Customizable Bistro Box post!

      The addition of colorful vegetables in these egg bites further boosts the nutrient content too. All in all, you can feel good about adding this wholesome meal or snack into your weekly routine.

      Can eggs be part of a heart healthy?

      Yes! The cholesterol in food doesn't impact your body's cholesterol, therefore, eggs do not negatively impact heart health. In fact, according to the American Heart Association, healthy people can enjoy ~7 eggs per week as part of a heart-healthy diet.

      Other foods that make up a heart-healthy diet includes fruits and vegetables, whole grains, lean protein, and healthy fats.

      Want to learn more about eating for heart health? Check out this new Heart Health Handbook to help you learn about heart healthy eating, including six new recipes, plus a simple breakdown about the different types of cholesterol and the role it plays in the diet and in our bodies. Download it now!

      Heart Health Handbook

      How to make air fryer egg bites

      With this recipe, you'll whip up delectable air fryer egg bites in just 20 minutes. You only need 4 ingredients for the egg bites with 3 topping options.

      Ingredients you'll need

      • Eggs: A complete protein base and a brain supporter for every age and stage.
      • Milk: Adds creaminess and richness to the egg mixture.
      • Vegetables: Diced into ¼" pieces for bursts of texture and nutrition.
      • Cheese: Adds delicious, umami goodness to each bite.
      • Toppings: Gives extra depth and flavor to these egg bites.
      Ingredients on white backdrop

      What seasonings do you need?

      We are keeping it simple and using salt and pepper to season these muffin tin egg bites. However, you can definitely get creative and add a dash of everything bagel seasoning, garlic powder, or red pepper flakes. 

      1. Mix ingredients

      In a large bowl, whisk together the eggs, milk, vegetables, shredded cheese, salt, and pepper.

      Mixing eggs, cheese, and veggies

      2. Add to liners

      Distribute the egg mixture evenly among 12 silicone muffin liners, filling each about ⅔ full.

      Air fryer egg bites
      Air fryer egg bites in basket

      3. Place in air fryer and cook

      Gently place the muffin liners in the air fryer and bake for 10-12 minutes until the egg bites are cooked through. To check doneness, remove an egg bite with tongs - if it's still runny, cook for another 2-4 minutes. The USDA recommends cooking egg dishes to 160°F.

      Baking air fryer egg bites

      4. Add toppings

      Once they're perfectly cooked, top your egg bites with diced avocado, halved cherry tomatoes, and sliced green onions for an extra flavor punch and texture!

      Tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: Enjoy your air fryer egg bites with a side of fresh fruit or a green smoothie for a balanced breakfast. 
      • Troubleshooting Tips:  To avoid overcooking and ending up with dry egg bites, start at the lower end of the cooking time range and then cook more if needed. Everyone's air fryer is slightly different with cook times.
      • Scaling Tips: Want to feed a crowd? Simply double or triple the recipe and cook in batches in the air fryer. These egg bites are perfect for meal prepping a bunch too!

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, these egg bites are completely customizable. You get to choose what type of milk, cheese, and veggies you want to use.

      • Milk - You can use any variety of dairy milk like skim milk, 1%, or whole milk. If you're not a fan of dairy milk, you could also swap for plain, unsweetened plant milk.
      • Veggies - Use a variety of any colorful veggies you have on hand or enjoy. The only vegetables you would NOT want to use here are raw root vegetables like potatoes, beets, or carrots. These will be too hard and don't cook quick enough.
      • Cheese - This recipe calls for any shredded cheese you like. We love a classic shredded cheddar but feel free to use cheddar jack, mozzarella, gruyere, or another type of shredded cheese. 

      What if I don't have an air fryer?

      Alternatively, you can also microwave these egg bites. To do this, use 4 ounce mason jars and fill halfway. Then, microwave for 60 seconds to cook.

      Microwave Egg bites

      Can I make them ahead of time?

      Absolutely! These egg bites are meal prep friendly. Whip up a batch on Sunday and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. You'll have a nutritious breakfast ready to go each morning, even on your busiest days.

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Meal prep air fryer egg bites
      Egg Bites Recipe Square
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Air Fryer Egg Bites

      These air fryer egg bites are perfect to take on-the-go or add to your weekend brunch board. They only take 20 minutes to make and pack in satisfying protein to power your day! Plus, you get to customize this egg bites recipe with any veggies of your choice.
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Cook Time15 minutes mins
      Total Time20 minutes mins
      Course: Breakfast Choices
      Cuisine: American
      Servings: 12 egg bites
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      Egg Bites:

      • 6 large eggs
      • ¼ cup milk of your choice (skim milk, 1% milk, whole milk, or lactose-free milk)
      • 1 cup quick-cooking vegetables of your choice*, diced into ¼″ pieces (I like to do a mixture of bell peppers and spinach. You could also add other veggies like zucchini, yellow squash, broccoli, corn, kale, mushrooms, or onions. Don't be afraid to use what you have!)
      • ½ cup shredded cheese of your choice (cheddar, mozzarella, cheddar jack, gruyere, etc.)
      • Salt and pepper, to taste

      Toppings:

      • Ripe avocado, diced
      • Cherry tomatoes, halved
      • Green onions, sliced
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Preheat air fryer to 300ºF. (Note: If air fryer doesn't have a preheat mode, simply let it heat for 2 minutes before adding the egg bites.)
      • Add all egg bite ingredients to a large bowl and whisk together.
      • Distribute egg mixture evenly among 12 silicone muffin liners, filing up each liner about ⅔ way full. This is about ¼ cup of the egg mixture per liner.
      • Use both hands or two tongs to gently place cups in air fryer basket and air fry for 10-12 minutes until cooked through. (Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may have to work in batches.)
      • Once the cooking is completed, be sure to check if it's complete by using two tongs to remove an egg cup. Then, use a knife to gently slice down the middle of one. If it's still runny, put back and cook for another 2 minutes.
      • Top egg bites with diced avocado, tomato, and green onions.
      • Store any leftover egg bites in an airtight container for up to 5 days in the fridge.

      Notes

      *Vegetable Note: The only vegetables you would NOT want to use here are raw root vegetables like potatoes, beets, or carrots. These will be too hard and don't cook quick enough.
      Microwave Note: If you don’t have an air fryer or want a quicker option, you can also microwave these egg bites. To do this, use 4 ounce mason jars and fill halfway. Then, microwave for 60 seconds to cook.

      save this egg bites recipe on pinterest:

      Taking a fork full of cheesy egg bites

      Want more? Try these other egg-forward recipes:

      • Make Ahead Egg Breakfast Burritos
      • Customizable Bistro Snack Box 
      • Easy Breakfast Tacos

      How to Wash Fruits and Vegetables

      August 18, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      Learn how to wash produce to maintain the freshness and safety of your fruits and vegetables. In this comprehensive guide, we'll explore the best practices to ensure your produce is clean, free from contaminants, and ready to be enjoyed!

      (This post is written by Cheerful Choices contributor, Claire Cooney.)

      Washing kale under kitchen faucet

      (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

      Table of Contents

      • Importance of washing produce
      • What are pesticides?
      • How to wash fruits and vegetables
        • 1. How to wash greens
        • 2. How to wash berries
        • 3. How to wash soft skin fruits
        • 4. How to wash potatoes and root vegetables 
        • 5. How to wash produce with skin

      Importance of washing produce

      We all know fruits and vegetables are full of vitamins and nutrients that are essential to our health. However, it's also essential to thoroughly wash produce before eating it. This helps wash away any dirt, bacteria, and pesticides. 

      What are pesticides?

      The term, "pesticide," can have multiple uses. Pesticides are any substance that prevents insects or other animals from eating plants. It is also used to regulate plants, allowing them to grow in the correct proportions. Pesticides are even used to keep soil stable to ensure that it is supplying the plant with the necessary nutrients. 

      There are also pesticides containing chemicals that can be harmful too. One common pesticide used on the produce is organophosphate, which may negatively impact our nervous system and certain hormone functions after too much exposure. The main component in organophosphate works to kill enzymes in pests that aren't wanted near the growing produce. When left on fresh fruits and vegetables for human consumption, this same component may have a negative impact on our nervous system. More research is needed to confirm the full health effects.

      How to wash kale in the sink

      How to wash fruits and vegetables

      Here's how to properly cleanse produce to safely enjoy, elongate it's fridge life, and have prepped fruits and veggies ready to go!

      1. How to wash greens

      Leafy greens are items like spinach, arugula, and romaine lettuce. Greens should be washed in a strainer over cold running water for a few minutes to ensure that it's fully clean. Next, it is important to dry off the greens before storing in the refrigerator. Drying greens allows them to stay fresher for longer and are easier to season.

      The fastest way to do this is to utilize a salad spinner that will rid the greens of excess water. Your greens are now ready to be stored, add a paper towel to the bottom of your dish and they should stay fresh for up to one week. Try adding kale to one pot soups or adding leafy greens to a savory peanut salad.

      How to wash greens

      2. How to wash berries

      To wash berries, like strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, start with a cold water rinse. Next, soak the berries in a solution of 3 cups water to 1 cup apple cider vinegar. This will give the berries a longer fridge life so that you can enjoy them in dishes such as a healthy strawberry snack or this lemon blueberry mug cake!

      Watch how to wash blueberries with this quick video!

      How to wash berries

      3. How to wash soft skin fruits

      Soft skin fruits, like peaches, kiwi, mangos, and apples, need to be washed differently in order to ensure that the nutrient-rich skin remains intact. It's best to wash these fruits by running them under softer water pressure. We also love freezing these fruits to add to apple banana smoothies or yogurt parfaits.

      How to wash carrots

      4. How to wash potatoes and root vegetables 

      Root vegetables are harder veggies like potatoes, beets, and carrots. They grow in the ground so we often purchase these vegetables with a residual layer of dirt. 

      If you're not planning on peeling the root vegetable, it's essential to use a soft brush to scrub the vegetable in order to remove the dirt from the skin. Before and after using a brush, make sure to run the vegetable under cold water to properly cleanse the produce item of residual dirt. Try roasting root potatoes and serve with a smoked paprika aioli.

      How to wash potatoes

      5. How to wash produce with skin

      Many produce items with thicker skin may seem safe to eat right after purchasing. These are items like avocados, bananas, and oranges. However when you cut these fruits, the bacteria and pesticides can glide along with the knife into the edible parts of the fruit. Be sure to still clean these fruits and veggies under cold running water before peeling and enjoying. 

      Overall, properly washing your produce is essential to maintaining your health and keeping you safe from harmful bacterias and pesticides. Happy washing! 

      Need more help creating meals with fruits and veggies?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      share this "how to wash fruits and vegetables" guide on pinterest:

      How to wash fruits and vegetables
      Claire Headshot

      About the guest contributor: Claire is currently a third year student at Colorado State University studying Nutrition and Food Science. She is aiming to become a registered Dietitian in order to teach other people about the importance of nutrition in their everyday life. Claire also enjoys running, hiking, and exploring Colorado in her free time.

      No Bake Cheesecake Bites

      August 17, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      These no bake cheesecake bites are so easy to whip up and use just one food processor for easy clean up. Made with a nutty crust, a creamy coconut milk filling, and toppings of your choice-these cheesecake cups are a sweet indulgence you can enjoy anytime.

      No bake cheesecake bites

      (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

      [ Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by XXX BRAND. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! ]

      Table of Contents

      • What are no bake cheesecake bites? 
      • How to make cheesecake bites:
        • 1. Blend the crust
        • 2. Press crust into muffin liners
        • 3. Blend the filling
        • 4. Distribute filling over muffin liners
        • 5. Add over toppings
        • 5. Freeze until hardened
      • Tips and tricks
        • Customize it your way
      • What to do with extra coconut milk
      • Are they vegan?
      • Can you make cheesecake bites ahead of time? 
      • How do you store these no bake mini cheesecakes?
        • save this no bake cheesecake bite recipe on pinterest:
      • Want more easy desserts? Try these other recipes
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      What are no bake cheesecake bites? 

      No bake cheesecake bites are just like they sound-mini cheesecake cups made without heating. Instead, the ingredients are layered and frozen into a solid bite. You'll also love them because they make for easy clean up.

      Are these cheesecake bites healthy?

      These cheesecake bites provide a creamy, rich taste while being loaded with nutrient-dense whole foods.

      One of the key ingredients in these cheesecake bites is raw nuts, which are an excellent source of healthy fats, protein, and fiber. Nuts have been shown to help lower cholesterol levels, reduce inflammation, and promote heart health. They are also a great source of vitamins and minerals, including vitamin E, magnesium, and zinc.

      Medjool dates, which are used to naturally sweeten the crust, are a great alternative to regular sugar. They're also packed with vitamins, minerals, and fiber. Dates are also a source of potassium and antioxidants.

      How to make cheesecake bites:

      1. Blend the crust

      Nuts of your choices and Medjool dates are the 2 ingredients that make up the crust.

      Blended dates and nuts

      2. Press crust into muffin liners

      Use about 1 tablespoon per 12 liners.

      Adding crust over liners
      Adding crust over liners

      3. Blend the filling

      Use the same food processor as you did for the crust-no need to clean it in between! We are using similar, sweet ingredients.

      Blended cheesecake filling

      4. Distribute filling over muffin liners

      Add over about 2 tablespoons per 12 liners.

      Cheesecake filling

      5. Add over toppings

      I'm all about Cheerful Choices- so feel free to use toppings of your choice. Our favorite is oreo cheesecake bites! Here are some ideas:

      • Berries
      • Chia seed jam
      • Crushed oreos
      • Chocolate chips
      • Sprinkles
      • Toasted coconut flakes
      • Granola
      No bake cheesecake bites

      5. Freeze until hardened

      Depending on your freezer, this can take 2-3 hours or more. Use your finger or gently press on the top to check if they are solid or not. Then, enjoy your no bake cheesecake bites or pop out of the freezer when you need a sweet treat.

      Tips and tricks

      • Blending: Be sure to use a food processor or high powered blender to make the crust and filling. This will ensure that everything is blended together smoothly.
      • Coconut Milk: Full fat coconut milk will have a cream that solidifies on the top. This is the part you'll want to use. If your house is hot, consider putting the canned coconut milk in the fridge for a couple hours to ensure the top cream solidifies. 
      • Serving Tips: We love enjoying these cheesecake bites as is, but they're also delish served with a dollop of whipped cream, ice cream, or a cookie on the side.
      Cheesecake cups stacked

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, these no bake cheesecake bites are completely customizable. You get to choose what nuts, sweetener, and toppings you want to use.

      • Nuts - For the no bake cheesecake bites crust you can use any nuts you have on hand. Try almonds, walnuts, cashews, or another type.
      • Sweetener - You can use maple syrup or if you want these bites to have zero added sugar, use naturally sweet date syrup.
      • Toppings - feel free to use your favorite toppings and make oreo cheesecake bites, strawberry cheesecake bites, or another variation!
      A look at the cheesecake crust

      What to do with extra coconut milk

      Since you don't use the whole can of coconut milk for this recipe, you'll end up with extra. I will often freeze it into a mason jar or ice cube trays to use later on. You can also add into the following applications:

      • Smoothies: Blend into morning smoothies for a creamy texture and subtle tropical flavor.
      • Coffee and Tea: Add to hot beverages for a dairy-free, rich latte or chai experience.
      • Sauces and Curries: Enhance savory dishes with a touch of coconut milk for added creaminess and flavor.
      • Desserts: Create dairy-free puddings, custards, and ice creams for indulgent treats.
      • Baking: Substitute for dairy milk in baked goods like cakes and muffins.
      • Creamy Soups: Use in soups and curries for a velvety texture and taste.
      • Mocktails/Cocktails: Incorporate into beverages for a tropical and refreshing element.
      • Chia Pudding: Make creamy overnight chia pudding for a nutritious breakfast.

      Are they vegan?

      You can easily make these into vegan cheesecake bites but substituting the Greek yogurt for another ⅓ cup of coconut milk. So instead of using ⅔ cup coconut milk, you would use 1 cup in total. This is even a good option for someone who doesn't have yogurt on hand.

      Cheesecake bites on a plate

      Can you make cheesecake bites ahead of time? 

      One of the best things about these no bake cheesecake bites is that they can be made ahead of time for meal prep. Simply prepare the bites according to the recipe, store them in an airtight container, and freeze them until you are ready to enjoy them. They make a great snack or dessert that you can grab and go when you are short on time.

      How do you store these no bake mini cheesecakes?

      You can store your mini cheesecake bites in a sealable bag for up to 3 months in the freezer. When you are ready to enjoy, simply set them out at room temperature for 5-10 minutes before serving. Or if you're impatient like us, you can microwave one at a time for 10 seconds for a quick thaw option!

      Cheesecake liners in pan frozen

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Cheesecake Bites 1
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      No Bake Cheesecake Bites

      These no bake cheesecake bites are so easy to whip up and use just one food processor for easy clean up. Choose any toppings of your choice too!
      Prep Time20 minutes mins
      Freeze Time3 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
      Total Time3 hours hrs 40 minutes mins
      Course: Sweet Treat Choices
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: cheesecake cups, no bake cheesecake bites
      Servings: 12 mini cheesecake bites
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Equipment

      • Silicone Baking Cups
      • Pitted Medjool Dates
      • 1-Ingredient Peanut Butter
      • Maple Syrup
      • Coconut Milk
      • Cashews

      Ingredients

      Crust:

      • ½ cup raw or roasted nuts of your choice (almonds, walnuts, or cashews)
      • 8 Medjool dates, pitted (about 1 cup total)

      Cheesecake:

      • ⅔ cup full fat coconut milk - scrape the cream off the top*
      • ⅓ cup plain Greek yogurt If vegan, sub for another ⅓ cup of the coconut milk cream
      • 3 tablespoons maple syrup or date syrup
      • 2 tablespoons creamy nut butter of your choice (peanut butter, almond butter, or cashew butter)
      • 1 tablespoon lemon juice, about ½ medium lemon juiced
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla
      • ¼ teaspoon salt

      Topping:

      • ½ cup toppings of your choice (berries, chia seed jam, crushed oreos, mini chocolate chips, sprinkles, toasted coconut flakes, granola, etc.)
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Line a muffin tin with 12 silicone cups or parchment liners.
      • In a food processor or blender, pulse together nuts and dates until sticky and crumbly, about 60 seconds. Divide 1 packed tablespoon mixture among 12 liners. Use the back of the tablespoon or your fingers to press into the bottom.
      • To the same food processor or blender, add in all cheesecake ingredients and blend together until smooth. (Note: this filling will be a bit thinner in consistency than a traditional cheesecake.)
      • Divide cheesecake mixture evenly over the crusts (about 2 tablespoons per cup). Place muffin tin in the freezer for 20 minutes to slightly harden the tops so the toppings won't sink down.
      • Then, divide toppings over cups. Feel free to use a single topping or a mixture of different ones.
      • Place in the freezer for another 3 hours until frozen. Remove from silicone cups or gently peel off paper liner. 
      • Storage: Store any extra cheesecakes in an airtight container in the freezer for up to 3 months. The cheesecakes will harden over time so I recommend setting them out at room temperature for 5-10 minutes before serving. Alternatively, you can microwave one at a time for 10 seconds for a quick thaw option.

      Video

      Notes

      Note on Coconut Milk: Full fat coconut milk will have a cream that solidifies on the top. This is the part you'll want to use. If your house is hot, consider putting the canned coconut milk in the fridge for a couple hours to ensure the top cream solidifies. You'll also end up with extra coconut milk-read my suggestions above on ways to use up the rest

      save this no bake cheesecake bite recipe on pinterest:

      Pinterest Mackenzie will do

      Want more easy desserts? Try these other recipes

      • Chocolate Smoothie
      • Strawberry Cookies
      • Chocolate Popcorn
      • Protein Powder Mug Cake

      15 Sustainable Food Brands

      August 16, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      Sustainability is the future. From travel and name-brands to agriculture and food, we are seeing organizations from all sectors focused on the goal of maintaining a sustainable future. Here are a few sustainable food brands and their commitment to a greener future.

      (This post is written by Cheerful Choices contributor, Katie Erickson.)

      Sustainable food brands guide

      (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

      Table of Contents

      • Why is sustainability important?
      • Other eco labels
      • Examples of sustainable food brands
        • Pete and Gerry's Organic Eggs
        • Ben & Jerry's
        • Once Upon a Farm
        • Drizzle Honey
        • Purely Elizabeth
        • Vermont Creamery
        • Alter Eco
        • Danone
        • Quinn Snacks
      • Others we love

      Why is sustainability important?

      For the sake of the planet and all living life it holds, it is our duty to ensure a healthy environment for future generations and the plants and animals that we share this beautiful place we call home. For our species, there are a number of ways we can minimize our energy usage and reduce our carbon footprint, including our most valuable need: what we eat. 

      Check out these 13 sustainable kitchen tips too!

      Broth made from veggie scraps

      B Corp brands

      Locating foods and food brands who share this desire for our world can often be difficult. Luckily in 2006, 3 friends recognized this same vision and started a movement. B Corporation, or Benefit Corporation, is a nonprofit network transforming the global economy to benefit all people, communities, and the planet.

      Over 7,000 companies in 91 countries are a part of it. To bear the B-Certified Stamp, they undergo rigorous tests of performance, accountability, and transparency based on factors like employee benefits and charitable donations. They are tested every 3 years and pay a yearly certification fee to maintain their social and environmental impact status.

      Variety of greens

      Other eco labels

      • Fair Trade Certified - Fair Trade Certified is an award-winning sustainable sourcing model aimed at improving lives while protecting the planet. Like B-Corp Certified companies, Fair Trade Certified companies undergo rigorous testing to meet the company's standards while protecting the livelihoods of farmers, fishers, and other producers, and environmental health at the core of its focus. (explain in 1-2 sentences)
      • Certified Humane - This registered nonprofit certification organization is dedicated to improving the lives of farm animals in food production. The Certified Humane organization does this by expanding consumer awareness that drives the demand for kinder and more responsible farming practices. 
      • Food Alliance Certified - Food Alliance is another nonprofit organization that offers a whole system certification to address safe and fair working conditions, humane treatment of animals, and environmental stewardship for farmers, ranchers, and the food and beverage industries. 
      • USDA Organic - This popular certification operation connects already certified companies and those looking to become certified to programs, services, and educational materials that help organic farms and businesses. With climate change and food security at the center of this organization, USDA Organic aims to ensure climate solutions are a top priority and that access to healthy foods promote well-being in an equitable way.  
      • Marine Stewardship Council - The Marine Stewardship Council has a mission to end overfishing and ensure seafood is sustainably caught. This organization recognizes the importance of fish and seafood in maintaining food security, so look for brands with the sea green label. 

      Examples of sustainable food brands

      Here are some brands and products you may already know and love. Their sustainable practices help have a minimal impact on the environment and optimal impact on employees, customers, and business. 

      Eggs stacked on top of each other

      Pete and Gerry's Organic Eggs

      Eggs are one of the most commonly recognized nutritious foods across the globe. In fact, packed inside the shell of one large egg are 6 grams of protein and important vitamins like B12, B2, vitamin-D, and the vitamin-like compound choline. They also contain minerals such as selenium and iron, all of which play a role in bone health, immunity, cell growth, and more. 

      Pete and Gerry's was B-certified in 2013 with the mission of partnering with family-owned farms to set the new standard of farming practices and animal care. Not only B-certified, this brand also bears the stamps of Certified Humane, USDA Certified Organic, and 1% for the Planet.

      Try using eggs in recipes like one pan frittatas and homemade protein bistro boxes.

      Ben & Jerry's

      As a dietitian, I'm all about balance-and that includes satisfying a sweet tooth! Ben & Jerry's Ice Cream aims to support positive change through thoughtful ingredients, activism, and by supporting important causes they feel strongly about. 

      B-Certified since 2012, Ben & Jerry's is sure to sweeten your summer while also helping farmers, animals, and the environment thrive. 

      Ice cream scoops stacked

      Once Upon a Farm

      Finding foods your little ones enjoy is no easy feat, let alone locating those that are tasty and nutritious. Thankfully, you can look no further - certified since 2017, Once Upon a Farm uses high-pressure pasteurization that locks in the nutrients and flavors of farm-fresh ingredients into craveable, organic snacks and meals for children of all ages. With varieties like Cauliflower Fields, Oats & Roots, and Ancient Grains & Greens, all fruit and veggie blends are organic, non-GMO, and contain no added sugar, preservatives, or other additives.

      Once Upon a Farm strives to be a purpose-led company that uses quality standards to test their ingredients for 400+ environmental and industrial toxins, including heavy metals. You can find this brand at a number of retail stores oreven build your own subscription online.

      Drizzle Honey

      Drizzle Honey was B-Certified in 2019 and is also a Certified Women-Owned and Operated company. They aim to provide safe habitats for bees to build their homes. The northern wildflower fields of Alberta offer bees access to a variety of pollen and nectar-rich food sources-including the clover that Drizzle Honey is known for.

      Drizzle Honey also donates to pollinator research and educates its customers on the importance of pollinators. They continue to partner with local beekeepers to maintain control of the quality and safety of their honey while reducing their carbon footprint.

      They have fun flavors like Cinnamon Spiced, Cacao Luxe, Turmeric Gold, and Berry Bliss! Try drizzling honey over sheet pan pancakes or blend into a smoothie bowl.

      Purely Elizabeth

      Just like Hippocrates felt that food is thy medicine and medicine is thy food, Purely Elizabeth believes that food can heal, and when you eat better, you feel better. That's why Elizabeth Stein set out 15 years ago and created delicious and wholesome products that don't sacrifice between nutritious ingredients and culinary taste. From her array of granolas and oatmeals to her cereals and cookbooks, Purely Elizabeth uses sustainability to thrive. 

      B-Certified in 2015, Purely Elizabeth understands we cannot continue to ignore the impact that scaling food products has on the health of the planet. To make this impact a positive one, the family at Purely Elizabeth supports farmers that are transitioning from traditional farming to regenerative agriculture practices. These methods work to restore soil health and broken ecosystems to help replenish the earth. You can find Purely Elizabeth products online  or in your local grocery store.

      Handful of soil

      Vermont Creamery

      There's nothing like a good cheese spread. Always ready for a summer picnic, football Sunday get together, or a BBQ at the neighbor's house. Cheese not only ignites the taste buds, it also brings people together. Specializing in fresh goat cheese, aged cheese, culinary creams, and cultured butter, Vermont Creamery has been crafting these outstanding products for over 35 years.

      B-Certified in 2014, Vermont Creamery has worked on perfecting every single detail of what they make. They also believe in their mission to spend energy on ensuring their business makes a positive impact on their employees, customers, farmers, communities, and their friends. They have a variety of fun goat cheese flavors like Wild Blueberry, Lemon & Thyme, Strawberry Spritz, and Chocolate & Cherry. They also haveaged cheeses like St. Albans and Coupole. Try adding their cheeses to a themed board like a valentine's charcuterie board or a fall charcuterie board.

      Alter Eco

      Mhmm, chocolate! The treat that accompanies every mood and occasion. Alter Eco is a chocolate-centric food company that cultivates their product through regenerative agriculture and carbon sequestration. oth of these practices aim to reverse climate change and manage air carbon dioxide concentrations by capturing excess carbon dioxide from the air and storing it in healthy soil.. 

      Alter Eco was B-Certified in 2009 and understands how climate change impacts all life on Earth. The company's mission is to offset disproportionately affected marginalized communities, who are threatened with food insecurity, a lack of a clean water supply, biodiversity, and so much more. Alter Eco uses the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) reports-a 1988 established intergovernmental body of the United Nations who advances scientific knowledge on climate change-to guide them on their business practices. 

      From Chocolate Nut Butter Bombs to Raspberry Blackout chocolate bars, -all products are Certified Organic and readily available at stores and online.

      Chocolate bars on top of each other

      Danone

      When you think of yogurt, you might also think of Danone, the maker of some of our favorite brands like Activa, Oikos, Silk, Evian, and Horizon Organic. Danone is established in countries all over the world including Canada, the United States, the United Kingdom, and Ireland, and B-Certified in each of them as well.In North America, Danone was B-Certified in 2018. 

      Danone puts high expectations on their products and expresses a mission of repairing the global food system with a more sustainable path moving forward. They believe this requires joining other like-minded companies to work towards social and environmental good for all. 

      Quinn Snacks

      Quinn creates environmentally conscious and transparently sourced snack foods, such as popcorn and pretzels. They recently became certified as a B Corporation in 2023. This certification reflects Quinn's longstanding commitment to sustainable agriculture, ingredient transparency, and the elimination of synthetics and chemicals from the food system, aligning with their efforts to positively impact workers, customers, communities, and the environment.

      Others we love

      Here are a few others we applaud for their dedication to sustainability. While they may not possess a B-Certification, they remain steadfast in their commitment to sustainable practices.

      • Clif Bar - energy-sustaining bars
      • Aquaculture Stewardship Council (ASC) - sustainably produced seafood
      • NOW Foods - powders and supplements
      • Maple Hill Creamery - grass-fed milk, yogurt, and kefir
      • Teton Waters Ranch - grass-fed and certified humane beef
      • Lotus Sustainables - reusable produce and tote bags for shopping
      • Richards Rainwater - clean caught water from the sky
      • Mushroom Council - mushrooms require very little land, water, or energy to grow
      • Pacific Coast Producers - canned foods with aluminum cans that are forever recyclable

      Have thoughts on other sustainable brands you think should be featured in this guide? Use the contact form to let us know!

      Final Thoughts

      With dozens of other food brands, as well as thousands of other varying sustainable products, check out who else is B-Certified here. From mattresses and shoes, to clothing and food, you're sure to find brands you're excited to try or those you already buy. 

      It's exciting when you discover products all over your home you already support. You'll feel like you belong to a community fighting for a common goal. And don't forget about those other sustainable certification organizations mentioned earlier. They too have designed a set of standards companies can follow to honor their commitment to sustainability for all. Sustainability for people, business, and most importantly… the little blue planet we all call home.

      share this sustainable brand guide on pinterest:

      Sustainable food brands
      FullSizeRender

      About the guest contributor: Katie is a recent graduate from Colorado State University with a degree in Food Science & Human Nutrition and a passion for food systems and environmental sustainability. Considering continuing her education in a Master's of Public Health, Katie is driven and inspired to help transition the food system into a more sustainable, accessible market. In her spare time, she can be found hiking or camping in the mountains, spending time with her loved ones and Boxer Charley, and researching current food policy and changes to the food system.

      Customizable Bistro Protein Box

      August 14, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 8 Comments

      This Bistro Protein Box recipe template is the perfect lunch or snack to meal prep ahead of time. These bistro boxes are ideal to pack for back to school or bring to work. Plus, you get to customize with a mix of your favorite proteins, energizing carbohydrates, crunchy veggies, and a tasty dip.

      Bento boxes with protein, carbs, and veggies

      Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by The American Egg Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

      Table of Contents

      • What is a bistro box?
      • How do you make a bistro protein box?
        • 1. Start with eggs
        • 2. Add extra proteins
        • 3. Add carbs
        • 4. Add veggies
        • 5. Don't forget the dip
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Can I make this box ahead of time?
      • How do I store these protein boxes?
        • save this bento box recipe on pinterest:
        • Want more? Try these other meal prep recipes
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      What is a bistro box?

      A bistro box is a box broken up into compartments/sections and filled with a balance of protein, carbs, veggies, and dip choices. It's also commonly called a "protein box" or "bento box. Crafting your own protein boxes at home is an easy way to save on time and cost.

      Simply mix and match various ingredients to suit your taste buds and dietary preferences. Plus, you can skip the grocery run and use up any bits of food you already have on hand!

      Mix and match these bistro protein boxes

      Are eggs healthy?

      A staple I always add to my bistro boxes is hard boiled eggs. This small but mighty ingredient is a nutrient powerhouse. One large egg packs in 6 grams of complete protein alongside essential vitamins and minerals for healthy living. Here are some benefits of eggs to keep in mind.

      Eggs for brain health

      The choline in eggs helps support lifelong brain health at every age and stage, including memory, thinking, mood and more. Choline isn't found in high quantities in many foods. Luckily, eggs are one of the most concentrated food sources of choline in the American diet.

      Choline is critical to good health and remains essential throughout the lifespan. Getting enough choline is especially important for pregnancy and early childhood development. In fact, recent studies have found maternal choline intake during the second and third trimesters can improve measures of cognitive function in infants and can have long term benefits on brain development and health.

      Carton of eggs with hard boiled eggs next to it

      Eggs for muscle recovery

      Eggs are considered a complete protein, meaning they contain all 9 essential amino acids (aka building blocks of proteins). Enjoying high-quality protein, like eggs, in combination with carbohydrates post-workout can help refuel our muscles and optimize recovery.

      The protein and good-for-you fat found in eggs can also help you feel fuller longer, making them a perfect choice for sustained energy throughout the day. Try meal prep breakfast burritos, veggie loaded egg muffins, or a savory potato hash for breakfast.

      Eggs fit into a heart-healthy diet

      Science is in alliance: Heart-healthy eating can include eggs, as supported by an abundance of research including a recent Harvard study evaluating up to 32 years of data.

      In fact, according to the American Heart Association, healthy people can include an average of seven eggs per week as part of a heart-healthy diet. Older adults with normal cholesterol and vegetarians can include more in the context of moderation.

      Empty bento box
      Protein in bento box
      Carbs in bento box
      Veggies in bento box

      How do you make a bistro protein box?

      Let's talk about how to assemble your completely customizable bistro protein box.

      1. Start with eggs

      These nutritional powerhouses are a great way to start your bistro box. You could meal prep hard-boiled eggs or try air fryer egg muffin bites (bonus points for adding veggies!).

      Hard boiled eggs on grey background

      2. Add extra proteins

      Along with the hard boiled egg, I recommend adding over 1 to 2 ounces (or about 2 to 4 tablespoons) of additional protein foods. 

      Here are some protein choices to try:

      • Nuts (almonds, walnuts, cashews, pistachios, etc.)
      • Nut Butter
      • Sliced Turkey or Chicken
      • Roasted Chickpeas
      • Edamame

      3. Add carbs

      Carbohydrates are the body's primary source of energy. Try to mainly choose ones filled with lots of vitamins, minerals, and fiber. 

      Here's some examples:

      • Fruit (strawberries, grapes, blueberries, sliced apples, orange segments, watermelon chunks, etc.)
      • Sliced Baguettes
      • Energy Bites
      • Pita Chips
      • Whole Grain Crackers
      • Rice Cakes
      Protein meal prep boxes

      4. Add veggies

      The goal is to get at least 3 servings of vegetables/day. This box includes ~1 serving of vegetables, helping you work towards this goal.

      Try these colorful veggie options:

      • Bell Peppers
      • Sliced Cucumber
      • Cherry Tomatoes
      • Carrot Chips
      • Snap Peas
      • Broccoli Florets
      • Celery Sticks
      • Cauliflower Florets
      • Zucchini Sticks
      • Feel free to add a variety of multiple different veggies too!

      5. Don't forget the dip

      I find plain veggies can get somewhat bland, so I recommend serving with a dip on the side.

      Here are some ones I love:

      • Hummus
      • Guacamole
      • Queso
      • Salsa
      • Black Bean Dip
      • Cottage Cheese
      • Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip
      • Peanut Sauce
      • Baba Ganoush
      • Pesto
      • Tzatziki
      Snack box with protein, fruits, and veggies

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: For an even more satisfying meal, you can pair your bistro box with a side salad or soup.
      • Troubleshooting Tips: If you find your veggies are getting a bit soggy after a few days, try placing a piece of paper towel at the bottom of the container to absorb excess moisture.
      • Scaling Tips: Making bistro boxes for a group, your kids, or multiple days? Simply repeat the instructions to make as many bistro boxes as you need.

      Can I make this box ahead of time?

      Absolutely! These snack boxes are ideal for meal prep. Add all the ingredients to the meal prep container sections and store in the fridge. These will save you time during busy weekdays and ensure you have a nutritious meal or snack box ready to go.

      Meal prep snack box in the fridge

      How do I store these protein boxes?

      Add an airtight lid over your protein boxes and store in the fridge for up to 5 days. Perfect to enjoy all week long! See this recipe in action on my Instagram video!

      Bistro boxes
      Bistro boxes stacked

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Bistro Boxes 2
      Print Recipe
      5 from 5 votes

      Bistro Protein Box

      This Bistro Protein Box recipe template is the perfect lunch or snack to meal prep ahead of time. Plus, you get to customize with a mix of your favorite proteins, energizing carbohydrates, crunchy veggies, and a tasty dip.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Total Time10 minutes mins
      Course: Main Dish Choices
      Keyword: bento box, bistro box, protein box, starbucks box
      Servings: 1 bistro box
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Equipment

      • Glass Bistro Box Container
      • Plastic Bistro Box Container

      Ingredients

      • 1 to 2 hard boiled eggs
      • 1 to 2 ounces protein of your choice (nuts, nut butter, sliced turkey or chicken, roasted chickpeas, edamame, etc.)
      • 1 cup carbohydrate of your choice (fruit, sliced baguettes, energy bites, pita chips, whole grain crackers, rice cakes, etc.*)
      • 1 cup vegetables of your choice (bell peppers, sliced cucumber, cherry tomatoes, carrot chips, snap peas, broccoli florets, zucchini sticks, etc. Feel free to do a variety too!)
      • 1 to 2 ounces dip of your choice (single serve hummus, guacamole, queso, salsa, black bean dip, cottage cheese, greek yogurt ranch dip, peanut sauce, baba ganoush, pesto, tzatziki, etc.)
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Protein
        Start by adding the hard boiled egg and protein choice to the top compartment of the bistro box. 
      • Carbohydrates
        Next, fill the bottom left compartment with your carbohydrate choice. 
      • Vegetables
        Then, in the bottom right compartment, place your vegetable choice. 
      • Dip
        Don't forget the dip! Add your dip choice to a separate single-serve container to have alongside your bistro box (or purchase single serve packs).
      • Feel free to repeat the same process for as many boxes as you'd like.
      • Store prepped bistro protein boxes in the fridge for up to 5 days until ready to eat.

      Video

      Notes

      Note on Amounts: The amount of ingredients you add to the bistro box will vary depending on your calories needs. If this is for a child or to have as a snack, you may consider adding less. If this is for an adult or to have as a meal, you may consider adding more.
      *Carbs Note: If you are adding crackers to the carbohydrate section, I’d recommend putting them in a separate resealable bag to put either inside of the box or on the side of the box. This will help prevent them from getting soggy or stale.

      save this bento box recipe on pinterest:

      Customizable Protein Bistro Boxes for back to school

      Want more? Try these other meal prep recipes

      • Customizable Power Bowl
      • Veggie Egg Pasta Salad with Chickpeas
      • Salted Caramel Protein Bites (shown in pictures)

      Vegan Tofu Tacos

      July 19, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

      This vegan-friendly tofu tacos recipe is perfect to make for meatless monday without sacrificing on taste or protein content. It contains crumbled tofu marinated in flavorful spices with customizable toppings of your choice! Options to either air fry or bake the tofu.

      Picking up corn tortilla with crumbled tofu filling

      (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love it
      • Ingredients You'll Need
      • How do you press tofu?
      • How do you make tofu tacos?
      • Should I make air fried tofu or baked tofu?
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Can I make these tofu tacos ahead of time?
      • How do I store leftover crumbled tofu?
      • Want more tofu recipes? Try these high protein options:

      Why you'll love it

      These tofu tacos are a tasty and satisfying alternative to traditional meat tacos. The crumbled tofu absorbs the Mexican-inspired marinade, resulting in a savory and flavorful filling similar to ground meat. Plus, these tacos are incredibly versatile, allowing you to use whatever toppings you like best. This is even a great option for parties where you can create a "taco bar" with all the various toppings for guests to choose from.

      Whether you're a vegan, vegetarian, or simply looking to incorporate more plant-based meals into your diet, these tofu tacos are a fantastic choice.

      3 tacos on a plate with cilantro sprinkled over

      Is tofu healthy?

      Tofu is the star ingredient of these tacos. It's an excellent source of plant-based protein with 8 grams of protein per 3 ounce serving. It's also packed with essential amino acids (protein build blocks) and minerals like iron, calcium, and magnesium. 

      Tofu Tacos Process

      Ingredients You'll Need

      • Firm or extra firm tofu - This versatile soy-based protein is widely available in grocery stores and can be found in the refrigerated section next to other plant-based products and dairy alternatives.
      • Low sodium soy sauce - Opting for low sodium soy sauce helps to reduce sodium intake without compromising flavor. If you are gluten-free, use tamari in place of soy sauce.
      • Nutritional yeast - This plant-based ingredient is made from deactivated yeast. Sounds weird, right? It's actually packed with nutrients such as vitamin B12 which is often lacking in a vegan diet. Nutritional yeast adds a cheesy, nutty flavor to the tofu.
      • White onion and bell pepper - These vegetables add texture and freshness to the tacos. Try picking them up at a local farmers market if you have access to one!
      • Oil of your choice - Use a high-quality oil like olive oil or avocado oil to sauté the onions and bell peppers.
      • Corn tortillas - Corn tortillas are naturally gluten-free and have a great flavor to compliment the tofu. You could also use flour tortillas if you prefer.

      How do you press tofu?

      For this recipe, we recommend pressing the tofu before crumbling to achieve a crispier texture. You can even cut your tofu in half before pressing it to make it more efficient.

      You can press the tofu by hand, by using a heavy object, or with a press made for tofu. Read my guide for full instructions on each of these methods!

      Tofu 2

      How do you make tofu tacos?

      Making this recipe is a breeze! Simply combine all ingredients in a bowl and bake or air fry until crispy. You can even make the mixture ahead of time and let "marinate" overnight.

      Tofu Tacos Process 1

      Should I make air fried tofu or baked tofu?

      Ultimately, this decision boils down to your personal preference and kitchen equipment. 

      Air fried tofu: If you're looking for a quicker cooking time and crave that crispy texture, air frying is the way to go. Air frying uses hot, circulating air to cook the tofu, resulting in a deliciously crispy exterior without the need for excessive oil. I use my air fryer in the summertime to avoid heating up the house with the oven.

      Baked tofu: If you prefer a slightly more tender texture and don't have an air fryer, baked tofu is a fantastic choice. Baking allows the tofu to retain more moisture, making it softer on the inside while still developing a delightful chewiness. Plus, it's a super simple method that just requires a large sheet pan.

      Tofu Tacos Process 2
      Tofu Tacos Process 3

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: While the tofu is cooking, it's the perfect time to make a side dish. These tofu tacos pair well with a variety of dishes such as Mexican rice, black beans, or a refreshing salad. As for drink options, a glass of freshly squeezed lemonade or a fruity mocktail can complement the flavors of the tacos perfectly.
      • Troubleshooting Tips: If the tofu seems too moist after baking, try baking for a few more minutes. Everyone's oven is different!
      • Scaling Tips: Feel free to double or triple the recipe to accommodate larger gatherings or for meal prepping. Simply adjust the quantities of the ingredients accordingly, and make sure to use multiple large baking sheets or do multiple batches in the air fryer.
      3 tacos on holder

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, these tofu tacos are completely customizable. You get to choose what toppings and fillings you want to use. These tacos are vegan friendly but you can add on non-vegan toppings if you'd like. 

      Here are some ideas to suit different dietary preferences:

      • Diced avocado/guacamole: Creamy avocado adds a rich and buttery texture to the tacos.
      • Diced tomatoes/salsa: Fresh tomatoes or salsa provide a burst of acidity and brightness.
      • Fresh chopped cilantro: Sprinkle some fresh cilantro for a vibrant herbal note.
      • Sour cream or plain Greek yogurt: For those seeking a tangy protein boost, plain Greek yogurt is a fantastic addition to these tofu tacos.
      • Lime slices: Squeeze some fresh lime juice over the tacos for a refreshing citrus twist.
      • Black beans: If you want even more protein than the tofu provides, feel free to sprinkle over black beans.
      • Pickled red onions: Add bright, zesty flavor. Grab our recipe for quick pickled red onions!
      Tofu tacos before toppings
      Tofu Tacos 7

      Can I make these tofu tacos ahead of time?

      Yes, you can! These tofu tacos are an excellent option for meal prep or making ahead of time. Prepare the tofu filling as instructed and store it separately from the tortillas and toppings. When ready to serve, simply reheat the tofu filling on the stovetop or in the microwave, warm up the tortillas, and assemble the tacos with your desired toppings.

      You can even use the crumbled and cooked tofu to other dishes like salad, wraps, power bowls, or make ahead burritos.

      How do I store leftover crumbled tofu?

      Store leftover tofu in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge. To reheat, you can either warm up the tofu filling on the stovetop or in the microwave. The tortillas and toppings are best when assembled fresh, so consider storing them separately and assembling just before serving.

      Tofu tacos recipe

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Tofu Tacos 7
      Print Recipe
      5 from 9 votes

      Tofu Tacos

      This tofu tacos recipe contains crispy, flavorful tofu crumbles served with customizable toppings! Options to either air fry or bake the tofu too.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time20 minutes mins
      Total Time30 minutes mins
      Course: Main Dish Choices
      Cuisine: Mexican
      Keyword: tofu tacos
      Servings: 4 servings (2 tacos per person)
      Calories: 270kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      Tofu Ingredients:

      • 1 - 14 ounce block firm or extra firm tofu, drained and pressed*
      • 2 tablespoons low sodium soy sauce, or tamari if gluten-free
      • 1 tablespoon nutritional yeast
      • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
      • 2 teaspoons chili powder
      • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
      • ½ teaspoon onion powder
      • ½ teaspoon paprika
      • ½ cup white onion, diced (about ½ small onion)
      • 1 small bell pepper of your choice, diced (red, orange, yellow)
      • 1 tablespoon oil of your choice (olive oil, avocado oil, etc.)
      • 8 corn tortillas

      Toppings of your choice:

      • Diced avocado/guacamole
      • Diced tomatoes/salsa
      • Fresh chopped cilantro
      • Sour cream, vegan sour cream, or plain Greek yogurt
      • Lime slices, for squeezing over
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Preheat your oven or air fryer to 400°F.
      • In a large bowl, crumble the pressed tofu into small pieces the size of a dime using your hands or a fork.
      • To the same bowl, add over soy sauce, nutritional yeast, ground cumin, chili powder, garlic powder, onion powder, paprika, diced onion, diced pepper, and oil and mix to combine. You can cook this mixture right away or let marinate for up to 24 hours in the fridge.
      • Oven instructions: Spread the tofu mixture evenly on a large baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Bake for 25-30 minutes, or until the tofu is slightly browned. Be sure to rotate the pan and stir halfway through. Remove the pan from the oven and let the tofu rest for 5 minutes to firm up before serving. 
      • Air fryer instructions: Spread the marinated tofu evenly on a large air fryer basket lined with parchment paper or sprayed with cooking oil. Bake for 10-12 minutes, or until the tofu is slightly browned. Be sure to remove the tofu and toss around halfway through cooking. Let tofu rest in the air fryer basket for 5 minutes to firm up before serving. 
      • Warm up corn tortillas by placing them on a pan (with no oil) over medium heat for 1-2 minutes per side or microwave tortillas in a slightly damp paper towel for 20 seconds.
      • To assemble tacos, spoon about ¼ cup crumbled tofu mixture onto the tortillas and add over any desired toppings.

      Notes

      *Note on pressing: You can press the tofu by hand, by using a heavy object, or with a press made for tofu. Read my guide HERE for full instructions on each of these methods!

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2tacos | Calories: 270kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 300mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g

      save this crispy tofu tacos recipe on pinterest:

      Tofu tacos to save on pinterest

      Want more tofu recipes? Try these high protein options:

      • Tofu Scramble for Breakfast
      • Tofu Thai Peanut Bowl for Lunch
      • "Orange" Tofu for Dinner
      • Chocolate Tofu Mousse for Dessert

      Watermelon Mocktail

      July 13, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

      This Watermelon Mocktail recipe is perfect for those scorching summer days when you need a refreshing drink to cool down. It contains juicy watermelon, zesty limes, and hydrating coconut water. Plus, you get to customize it with your choice of sparkling water and sweetener. Read on to learn about the benefits of watermelon as well as tips and tricks for making this mocktail.

      Refreshing watermelon mocktail on white backdrop

      Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by the National Watermelon Promotion Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! This post may also contain affiliate links. See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Why You'll Love It:
      • Is watermelon healthy?
        • Hydrating 
        • Vitamins and minerals
        • A slice of happy
      • Can watermelon be frozen?
        • How to freeze watermelon:
        • Frozen watermelon recipes
      • How do you make these watermelon mocktails?
        • 1. Gather everything you need 
        • 2. Blend together your ingredients
        • 3. Strain out the mixture
        • 4. Assembly the final drink
      • Recipe tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Making this watermelon mocktail recipe ahead of time
      • Can I store leftovers?
        • save this watermelon mocktail recipe on pinterest:
        • Want more watermelon? Try these other recipes:
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      Why You'll Love It:

      This Watermelon Mocktail is the perfect way to savor the taste of summer. Its vibrant color and easy prep makes it a fantastic choice for outdoor parties and weekend brunch. Here's why you'll love making this refresher.

      • Hydrating: Watermelon and coconut water team up to provide hydration that your body craves, especially during those scorching days.
      • Easy to Make: With just a few simple steps, you'll have this mocktail ready to sip in no time. 
      • Healthy: This watermelon drink uses simple, high quality ingredients that are good for our health. Mocktails also offer a satisfying and enjoyable experience without the alcohol.
      Halved watermelon
      Scooping watermelon with melon baller

      Is watermelon healthy?

      As a dietitian, I absolutely love watermelon and the nutrients it has. You can eat the whole watermelon, including the rind. The rind can be added to all kinds of recipes including sauces, kimchi, and more. Just be sure to thoroughly wash your watermelon with water before cutting. 

      Although watermelon is commonly enjoyed during the summer, it's available year-round. To pick the best watermelon, look for one free of damages and one with a yellow spot on the bottom. This creamy spot indicates that it was on the ground for enough time to properly ripen before it was picked. A perfectly ripe watermelon will be bursting with a juicy, sweet flavor.

      Mocktails garnished with fresh mint
      Grabbing mocktail from table

      Here's a few health benefits that watermelon provides.

      Hydrating 

      Watermelon is 92% water, making it an excellent food to contribute to overall hydration. Hydration is essential for many functions including digestion, metabolism, and our body's temperature regulation. This watermelon mocktail can help promote even more hydration too! 

      Vitamins and minerals

      Watermelon is a nutrient-dense fruit brimming with benefits. Each slice delivers powerful phytonutrients, satiating fiber, and vitamins and minerals. 

      In fact, just two cups of watermelon has 80 calories alongside vitamins A (8% DV), B1 (8% DV),  B6 (5% DV), and C (25% DV), and the minerals potassium (6% DV), magnesium (6% DV), and phosphorus (2% DV). All of these nutrients help to support our health and wellness in different ways (read more about it here)!

      A slice of happy

      According to new research from the National Watermelon Promotion Board, 82% of watermelon purchasers say eating watermelon boosts their mood! They also found that 100% of respondents said watermelon makes them feel either very happy (70%) or somewhat happy (30%). 

      Four glasses of watermelon mocktails surrounded by watermelon slices

      Can watermelon be frozen?

      Watermelon can be frozen in various different forms such as melon balled, cubed, or blended. This is a great option, especially if you have extra watermelon you can't eat right away.

      I love freezing watermelon balls to add to this mocktail and provide a refreshing icy element to the drink.

      How to freeze watermelon:

      1. Start by cutting the fresh watermelon into small, bite-sized cubes or use a melon baller to create watermelon balls.
      2. Lay the watermelon pieces in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.
      3. Place the baking sheet in the freezer and let the watermelon freeze for a few hours or until completely solid.
      4. Once frozen, transfer the watermelon balls into a resealable freezer bag or an airtight container for future use. Be sure to label and date it.
      5. By freezing watermelon in advance, you'll have a stash of ready-to-use frozen watermelon balls whenever you want to whip up this Watermelon Mocktail. These frozen watermelon balls not only keep the drink chilled but also provide a fun texture and extra burst of flavor.
      Frozen watermelon balls

      Frozen watermelon recipes

      You can also enjoy frozen watermelon blended into numerous different recipes. Here's some fun ones to try:

      • Watermelon Daiquiri
      • Watermelon Mojito Sorbet
      • Watermelon Kiwi Smoothie

      How do you make these watermelon mocktails?

      You can whip these refreshing watermelon drinks together in no time. Here's how to make them:

      Ingredients needed including coconut water, lime, and mint

      1. Gather everything you need 

      This recipe only calls for a few key ingredients but they're all key in creating the best drink experience.

      Watermelon and lime in blender
      Watermelon and lime in blender
      Blended mocktail mixture

      2. Blend together your ingredients

      You'll start by blending together fresh watermelon, whole limes, coconut water, and sweetener. Be sure to use refrigerated or room temperature watermelon for this step, not frozen.

      Straining out watermelon mixture
      Strained watermelon refresher

      3. Strain out the mixture

      Through the blending process, you'll end up with some extra pulp. You could definitely go without straining it, but I prefer straining for the best mocktail texture. 

      Adding fresh mint over watermelon drinks

      4. Assembly the final drink

      After you have the strained mixture, you'll just pour it over frozen watermelon balls, top with sparkling water, and garnish.

      Recipe tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: I love to pair this Watermelon Mocktail with a light summer salad or grilled seafood for a refreshing and balanced meal.
      • Sweetness: If your watermelon mixture is too tart for your liking, add a bit extra sweetener to balance it out.
      • Scaling: To serve a larger crowd, simply double or triple the recipe. You can also keep the watermelon mixture in the pitcher, add over the sparkling water, and have people serve themselves from the pitcher.
      Pitcher of watermelon mocktail

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this Watermelon Mocktail is completely customizable. You get to choose certain ingredients you want to use. Here are a few ideas:

      • Sweetener of your choice - I prefer to use ½ teaspoon liquid stevia (~40 drops) but you could also use about 2 or so tablespoons monk fruit or white sugar. You could even experiment with using other sweetener options like agave or honey. Use whatever you prefer and have on hand!
      • Sparkling water of your choice - There are hundreds of different bubbly waters on the market nowadays. Choose your favorite flavor that includes zero added sugar. Bonus points for using a watermelon flavored sparkling water!

      Making this watermelon mocktail recipe ahead of time

      While this mocktail is best enjoyed immediately after preparation, you can make the blended watermelon mixture ahead of time and store it in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Then, assemble the drink by adding the frozen watermelon balls to glasses, pouring over the watermelon mixture and sparkling water, and garnishing.

      Can you freeze watermelon? Yes!
      Pouring mixture over glass

      Can I store leftovers?

      Store any leftovers of this watermelon cooler in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. For longer storage, you can freeze the watermelon mixture in ice cube trays and use them as flavor-packed additions to future mocktails.

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Watermelon Mocktails square
      Print Recipe
      5 from 3 votes

      Watermelon Mocktail

      This hydrating Watermelon Mocktail contains juicy watermelon, zesty limes, and coconut water. Top it off with your choice of sparkling water before garnishing with fresh mint.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Total Time10 minutes mins
      Course: Drink Choices
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: watermelon mocktail
      Servings: 4 drinks
      Calories: 70kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      • 4 cups fresh watermelon, cubed or melon balled
      • 2 small limes, ends removed
      • 1 cup 8 ounces unsweetened coconut water
      • Sweetener of your choice, added to taste (I prefer to use ~½ teaspoon liquid stevia but you could also use ~2 tablespoons monk fruit or white sugar)*
      • 2 cups frozen watermelon balls, about 5 balls per glass
      • 2 cups sparkling water of your choice (plain or your favorite flavor)
      • Ice cubes, optional
      • Fresh mint leaves, optional
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • In a blender, combine watermelon, whole limes**, coconut water, and sweetener. Blend for just 10-15 seconds until pureed.
      • Strain the watermelon mixture over a pitcher through a fine-mesh sieve to remove any pulp or seeds. Use the back of a spoon to gently press down on the pulp to help speed up the straining process. 
      • Place frozen watermelon balls into 4 tall individual glasses. (If you don't have any ready to go, feel free to just use ice cubes.)
      • Evenly distribute the strained watermelon mixture between the 4 glasses.
      • Add about ½ cup of sparkling water to each glass to top it off with some bubbles.
      • If desired, add a few ice cubes to each glass to keep the drink chilled for longer and garnish with fresh mint leaves on top.
      • This watermelon mocktail is best if enjoyed right away but can be stored in the fridge and enjoyed for up to 24 hours too.

      Video

      Notes

      *Sweetness: This drink leans towards the less sweet/more tart side, but feel free to add more sugar to taste if you like your mocktails more sweet!
      **Whole limes: For this recipe, we are using the whole lime, skin and all. This gives it a super fresh, tart taste. However, if you prefer your drink with less of the lime flavor, you can just use the juice from 2 small limes and discard the skin.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1drink | Calories: 70kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g

      save this watermelon mocktail recipe on pinterest:

      Grabbing watermelon mocktails

      Want more watermelon? Try these other recipes:

      • Watermelon Caprese Salad
      • Watermelon Rind Orzo Salad
      • Watermelon "Cupcakes"

      Chocolate Smoothie

      July 7, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

      This chocolate smoothie recipe is perfect for those who want to enjoy a satisfying breakfast while sneaking some greens in. It contains a delicious blend of nutrient-packed ingredients like leafy greens, cocoa powder, and Medjool dates. There are plenty of options for customizing this smoothie to your liking too.

      Chocolate smoothie with kale and blueberries in the background

      (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

      Table of Contents

      • Why you'll love this chocolate smoothie
      • Tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Can I make this smoothie ahead of time?
        • save this chocolate smoothie recipe on pinterest:
      • Craving a smoothie bowl instead?
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      Why you'll love this chocolate smoothie

      This chocolate smoothie is a dream come true for all the chocolate lovers out there. It combines the rich and indulgent flavor of cocoa powder and dark chocolate chips with a hint of sweetness from ripe bananas and dates. The creamy texture, courtesy of yogurt and milk, makes it a velvety delight to sip on. Plus, it's packed with nutritious additions like kale or spinach-but you'd never know! 

      Holding out chocolate smoothie glass

      Is this chocolate smoothie healthy?

      Yes, this chocolate smoothie is filled with simple, whole food ingredients.

      • Cocoa Powder - give our smoothie the chocolatey goodness while also providing antioxidants. Research suggests that cocoa powder may help lower blood pressure and improve heart health. 
      • Kale or Spinach - packed with vitamins and minerals like vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin K, folate, and potassium.
      • Blueberries and Medjool dates- deliciously sweet and a good source of fiber and vitamin C.

      All of these ingredients provide flavor and sweetness so you can satisfy your chocolate cravings while nourishing your body.

      Tips and tricks

      • Serving Tips: This chocolate smoothie pairs well with a variety of side dishes such as a slice of whole grain toast, a handful of nuts, or a small serving of Greek yogurt. For an extra treat, try serving it with a dollop of whipped cream or a sprinkle of coconut flakes. 
      • Troubleshooting Tips: If your smoothie turns out too thick, simply add a splash of milk and blend again. On the other hand, if it's too thin, add a few ice cubes and blend until desired consistency is reached.
      • Scaling Tips: Need to make more servings than one? No problem! Simply double or triple the ingredients while keeping the ratios the same. Adjust the blending time accordingly to ensure a smooth texture.
      Chocolate smoothie with bamboo straw

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this chocolate smoothie is completely customizable. You get to choose what greens, yogurt, and milk you want to use. Here are some options to suit different dietary preferences:

      • Leafy Greens: Feel free to use either kale or spinach. I love grabbing these at my local farmers market! If you end up with extra that are about to go bad, simply throw in a zip top reusable bag and freeze.
      • Yogurt: You can use a plain yogurt or a fun flavored one. If you're vegan, you can simply use a dairy-free yogurt instead.
      • Milk: Use regular dairy or opt for plant-based milk alternatives.
      • Other Add-Ins to Consider: Feel free to blend in other smoothie nutrient-boosters like nut butters, protein powder, or seeds.

      Can I make this smoothie ahead of time?

      While this chocolate smoothie is best enjoyed pretty soon after blending, you can prepare the ingredients ahead of time. Simply slice and freeze the banana, wash and store the kale, wash the blueberries, and pre-pit the dates. When you're ready to indulge, just toss the prepped ingredients into the blender, add the remaining components, and blend until smooth.

      Chocolate smoothie with bamboo straw with kale and blueberries in the background

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Chocolate Smoothie 2
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Chocolate Smoothie

      This chocolate smoothie recipe is perfect for those who want to enjoy a satisfying breakfast while sneaking some greens in. It contains a delicious blend of nutrient-packed ingredients like leafy greens, cocoa powder, and Medjool dates
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Total Time5 minutes mins
      Course: Drink Choices
      Keyword: chocolate smoothie
      Servings: 1 - 16 ounce smoothie
      Calories: 360kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Equipment

      • Pitted Medjool Dates
      • Cocoa Powder

      Ingredients

      • ½ cup roughly chopped kale leaves or spinach leaves
      • ½ cup sliced and frozen ripe banana
      • ¼ cup frozen blueberries
      • ¼ cup yogurt of your choice (plain Greek, flavored, or vegan option)
      • 2 pitted Medjool dates
      • 2 teaspoons unsweetened cocoa powder, plus more for garnish
      • 2 teaspoons mini dark chocolate chips, plus more for garnish
      • 1 cup milk of your choice, (dairy milk, almond, oat, coconut, etc.)
      • ½ cup ice, optional for a thicker smoothie
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Add all ingredients to a blender and blend on high until combined.
      • Feel free to garnish your smoothie with additional dark chocolate chips and a sprinkle of cocoa powder for added visual appeal.

      Notes

      Nutrition

      Calories: 360kcal | Carbohydrates: 73g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 200mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 56g

      save this chocolate smoothie recipe on pinterest:

      Sneak your greens in with this delicious chocolate smoothie. Filled with ingredients like kale, cocoa powder, blueberries, and Medjool dates!

      Craving a smoothie bowl instead?

      Check out my chocolate smoothie bowl with hidden cauliflower rice and loads of nut butter!

      Blueberry Lemonade

      June 23, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      Blueberry lemonade is a refreshing and easy drink to make for hot summer days. This "magic" version combines ingredients like butterfly pea powder and edible glitter for an enchanting spin on classic lemonade. You also have the option to customize the sweetener-use stevia, agave syrup, or simple syrup.

      Refreshing purple lemonade infused with blueberries and butterfly pea powder

      Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by U.S. Highbush Blueberry Council. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! This post may also contain affiliate links. See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Is this blueberry lemonade nutritious?
        • Why are blueberries healthy?
          • Heart health benefits
          • Brain health benefits
          • Hydration Benefits
        • How do you make magic blueberry lemonade?
          • 1. Combine blueberries and butterfly pea powder
          • 2. Add lemon juice
          • 3. Stir in all other ingredients
        • Tips and tricks
        • Customize it your way
        • Can you make it ahead of time?
        • What if there's leftover lemonade?
          • Have extra blueberries? Try making these other recipes:
          • save this blueberry butterfly pea lemonade on pinterest:
        • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

        Is this blueberry lemonade nutritious?

        Yes! This blueberry lemonade is lightly sweetened and contains simple ingredients that offer several health benefits. The real star of this recipe is blueberries alongside butterfly pea flower powder and vitamin C abundant lemons.

        Blueberry lemonade ingredients on white backdrop

        What is butterfly pea flower powder?

        Along with blueberries bright blue hue, this recipe uses butterfly pea flower powder to achieve its unique color. Butterfly pea powder is ground from the petals of the butterfly pea flower. Although it's much less researched than blueberries, butterfly pea flowers contain anthocyanins.

        Why are blueberries healthy?

        Blueberries are a good source of vitamin C, vitamin K, manganese, and phytonutrients like "anthocyanins". Anthocyanins are a type of pigment which gives these berries their bright blue hue. Blueberries can also have the following benefits.

        Heart health benefits

        A growing body of scientific evidence shows blueberries can be considered a heart-healthy fruit. For example, blueberries are a good source of dietary fiber (4 grams per 1 cup serving), which can help to promote overall heart health.

        Brain health benefits

        June is Brain Health Month! Did you know blueberries can play a role in keeping our mind sharp? This is important because in the United States, nearly six million older adults live with dementia. Since limited treatments for cognitive decline exist, preventative approaches and proper nutrition are so importance. 

        The randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial, "Blueberry Supplementation in Midlife for Dementia Risk Reduction," looked at the impact of blueberry supplementation for potential brain benefits (in the context of aging and insulin resistance). Twenty-seven participants which included men and women between the ages 50-60 years old with subjective cognitive decline and moderate insulin resistance were involved in the study. Over the course of 12 weeks, participants were randomly assigned to consume either freeze-dried blueberry powder or placebo powder daily.

        The study results found blueberries may induce metabolic and other benefits that could serve as an early intervention for preventing the cognitive decline associated with aging. Though, further research is needed to look at blueberry supplementation over a longer time period, with a larger sample size.

        Blueberry Lemonade 11

        Hydration Benefits

        Drinking this blueberry lemonade can help keep you hydrated throughout the day. Blueberries are about 85% water too so once you get to the bottom of your lemonade-be sure to pop in that boost of blue!

        How do you make magic blueberry lemonade?

        This recipe is super simple to make but adds a major wow factor to any picnic, girls night, or summer cookout. Gather your ingredients and get ready to make this blueberry butterfly pea lemonade in no time. 

        1. Combine blueberries and butterfly pea powder

        Stir blueberries and the powder in a pitcher of water until it turns bright blue. You can use either fresh or frozen blueberries. You can find the butterfly powder at a local spice/tea shop or online. 

        Blueberry-infused lemonade turning from vibrant blue to a delightful shade of purple
        Glare Remove

        2. Add lemon juice

        This is where it gets magical! The acidic nature of lemons triggers a color transformation when added to the blue water. As the lemon juice is added, the water changes from blue to a delightful light purple, and then eventually deepening into a captivating dark purple. Pretty cool, right?

        There's many different ways to juice a lemon. Ultimately, be sure to juice them before adding to the water to prevent any seeds from getting in.

        Edible glitter sprinkled over lemonade pitcher

        3. Stir in all other ingredients

        Finally, you'll stir in the sweetener, edible glitter, and ice. You can find edible glitter at specialty baking supply stores or online. If you can't get any in time, no worries. You can simply skip it.

        Tips and tricks

        • Sweetness - Adjust the sweet level to your preference by adding more or less sweetener.
        • Infusion - The longer this lemonade sits, the better the blueberry infusion will get!
        • Muddling Tip - If you're wanting a more pronounced blueberry flavor right away, gently muddle a few blueberries before adding them to the water.
        • Variations - Feel free to get creative with different variations! You can add over fresh mint or replace the still water with sparkling water for a fizzy twist.
        Tall pitcher filled with butterfly pea lemonade and topped with fresh blueberries

        Customize it your way

        Like all of my other recipes, this blueberry lemonade is completely customizable. You get to choose what liquid sweetener you want to use. Here are a few options to consider:

        • Agave Syrup - If you prefer a natural and mild sweetness, agave syrup is an excellent choice. It blends seamlessly with the flavors of blueberries and lemon.
        • Simple Syrup - For a classic touch, you can use simple syrup as your liquid sweetener. Made from equal parts sugar and water, simple syrup dissolves easily and evenly distributes sweetness throughout the drink.
        • Liquid Stevia - We often like to make a stevia lemonade. This is a great zero-calorie, zero-sugar option. You'll find liquid stevia in the baking aisle or online.
        • Other Options - If you have another favorite liquid sweetener in your pantry, feel free to use it! Maple syrup, honey, or date syrup are all great alternatives that will add their unique flavor notes to the Blueberry Lemonade.
        Glass of Blueberry lemonade with a vibrant blue purple hue and a touch of butterfly pea flower

        Can you make it ahead of time?

        Absolutely! You can prepare this blueberry lemonade ahead of time and store it in the fridge. Just don't add the ice ahead of time or it will dilute it. Then once you're ready to serve, top it off with ice cubes, give it a good stir, and pour.

        What if there's leftover lemonade?

        You can store any leftover blueberry lemonade in a covered glass or pitcher in the fridge. It will stay fresh for up to 4 days. If you'd like to prolong its shelf life, pour the remaining lemonade into ice cube trays and freeze. You can then use the frozen cubes to chill and flavor more homemade blueberry lemonade!

        Blueberry Lemonade Square
        Print Recipe
        5 from 2 votes

        Blueberry Lemonade

        This blueberry lemonade is the perfect refreshing, hydrating drink to make all summer long. This "magic" version combines color-changing ingredients like butterfly pea powder, fresh lemons, and sweetener of your choice.
        Prep Time5 minutes mins
        Total Time5 minutes mins
        Course: Drink Choices
        Cuisine: American
        Keyword: blueberry lemonade, butterfly pea lemonade, stevia lemonade
        Servings: 4 servings
        Calories: 40kcal
        Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

        Ingredients

        • 4 cups cold water
        • ½ cup fresh or frozen blueberries, plus more for garnish
        • ½ teaspoon butterfly pea flower powder
        • 4 medium lemons, juiced
        • Liquid sweetener of your choice, to taste* (I prefer to use about ½ teaspoon liquid stevia but you could also use about ¼ cup agave syrup or simple syrup)
        • Blue or silver edible glitter, optional
        • Ice cubes
        instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

        Instructions

        • In a 1 quart or larger pitcher, add 4 cups of cold water and blueberries.
        • Gradually stir butterfly pea powder into the water. Continue stirring until the powder is dissolved and the water turns a vibrant blue color.
        • Next, pour the juice of the lemons over the water. The acidity will turn the water from a blue color to light purple at first. Then, as it settles it will turn into a darker purple color.
        • Next, add the liquid sweetener of your choice and a sprinkle of edible glitter if desired. Stir well until fully incorporated.
        • Add ice cubes into the pitcher before pouring into individual glasses filled with ice.
        • Garish individual glasses with more blueberries.

        Video

        Notes

        *Note: This definitely leans towards the less sweet side, but feel free to add more to taste if you like your lemonade more sweet!

        Nutrition

        Serving: 1serving | Calories: 40kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 1g | Sodium: 10mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g

        Have extra blueberries? Try making these other recipes:

        • Blueberry Sheet Pan Pancake
        • Berry Chia Jam
        • Blueberry Caprese Skewers
        • Blueberry Quesadilla

        Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

        In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

        save this blueberry butterfly pea lemonade on pinterest:

        Blueberry lemonade is a refreshing and easy drink to make for hot summer days. This

        Strawberry Cookies

        May 30, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

        These strawberry cookies are a great way to satisfy your sweet tooth with a boost of protein (7 grams per serving!). They're filled with nutrient-dense additions like protein powder, freeze dried strawberries, and chocolate chips of your choice. Plus, this recipe comes together in just 20 minutes.

        Cookies next to Cheerful Choices cutting board

        (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

        Table of Contents

        • Are these strawberry cookies healthy?
        • How do you make strawberry cookies?
          • 1. Gather your ingredients
          • 2. Cream butter and sugar
          • 3. Add in rest of ingredients
          • 4. Roll into balls and bake
        • Tips and tricks
        • Can you bake cookies in an air fryer?
        • Customize it your way
        • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
          • save this strawberry cookie recipe on pinterest:

        Are these strawberry cookies healthy?

        These cookies do contain indulgent ingredients like butter and sugar, but they can still have a place in a balanced diet. My suggestion is to be mindful of portion sizes and enjoy around 2 cookies in one sitting. By keeping the portions in check, you can still satisfy your sweet tooth without going overboard. Remember, moderation is key!

        These cookies also use freeze dried strawberries filled with fiber and vitamin C. Plus, in the flour mixture we're adding protein powder for a boost of protein. In fact, a serving of 2 small cookies packs in 7+ grams of protein depending on what protein powder you use.

        Holding up freshly baked strawberry cookies, perfect blend of sweet and fruity.

        Why is protein important?

        Adding protein powder to recipes like smoothies, mug cakes, and cookies can boost potential health benefits. Here are some of the benefits of higher protein cookies:

        Increased satiety

        Adding high protein ingredients to cookies can increase satiety and help reduce overall calorie intake. This can be particularly helpful for those looking to lose weight or maintain a healthy weight.

        Improved muscle health

        Protein is essential for building and maintaining muscle mass. Enjoying protein powder in a variety of different recipes is a convenient way to boost your protein intake.

        Better blood sugar control

        Protein can help regulate blood sugar levels by slowing down the absorption of carbohydrates. Adding high protein ingredients to cookies may help prevent the blood sugar from spiking.

        How do you make strawberry cookies?

        These higher protein strawberry cookies come together in no time. Feel free to use a stand mixer, hand mixer, or food processor to blend.

        1. Gather your ingredients

        For this recipe, we're using ingredients such as butter, sugar, flour, vanilla extract, protein powder, freeze-dried strawberries, and chocolate chips.

        Ingredients on white backdrop

        2. Cream butter and sugar

        Start by creaming together softened butter and sugar until the mixture becomes smooth and creamy. This creates a luscious base for your cookies.

        Dough mixed together

        3. Add in rest of ingredients

        Next, incorporate the remaining ingredients, including flour, vanilla extract, protein powder, crushed freeze-dried strawberries, and your choice of chocolate chips. Mix everything together until a thick dough forms.

        Hand mixer next to dough

        4. Roll into balls and bake

        Take the dough and roll it into small balls, about 1 inch in diameter. Place them on a lined baking sheet and bake in a preheated oven at 350°F (175°C) for 10-12 minutes, or until the edges turn golden brown. Let them cool slightly before enjoying.

        Strawberry cookie scoops
        Strawberry cookies finished on baking sheet

        Tips and tricks

        • Strawberry option: We don't recommend using fresh strawberries. For the best results, use freeze dried strawberries. You can find these in the dried fruit or snack aisle.
        • Softening the butter: To easily soften the butter, leave it at room temperature for about 30 minutes or overnight before starting the recipe. Alternatively, you can microwave the butter in short intervals, checking frequently to ensure it softens without melting.
        • Baking time and temperature: Keep a close eye on the cookies while they bake. Oven temperatures may vary, so start checking at around 10 minutes. The cookies are done when the edges turn golden brown. Avoid overbaking to maintain a soft and chewy texture.

        Can you bake cookies in an air fryer?

        Yes! If you prefer not to use your oven or need to make a smaller batch of cookies, the air fryer is a great alternative. Simply line your air fryer basket with parchment paper that fits properly, then air fry the cookies at 300ºF for 6-8 minutes until the edges turn golden brown. This method allows for quick and efficient baking in the air fryer while still achieving delicious results.

        Can you turn these into strawberry cookie bars?

        If you're not in the mood to scoop the dough into individual cookies, I have tested making this batch of dough into cookies bars too. Follow the same instructions for making the dough. Then, press the dough into an 8x8 square baking pan. Bake at the same temperature of 350ºF (175°C) for about 18-20 minutes until just lightly golden brown around the edges. Be cautious of overbaking as it can cause try dry cookie bars.

        Strawberry cookies finished on baking sheet

        Customize it your way

        Like all of my other recipes, these strawberry cookies are completely customizable. 

        • Chocolate chips of your choice - You get to choose any chocolate chips you want to use. We personally love using dark chocolate chips for extra antioxidants. You can also use white chocolate chips or milk chocolate chips. Any flavor pairs great with the strawberries!
        • Sugar substitute - If you're looking to lower to sugar content, feel free to replace the sugar for a 1:1 substitute such as Purecane or monk fruit.
        • Flour - If you follow a gluten-free diet, feel free to use a gluten-free flour in place of regular flour.
        Strawberry cookies made with protein powder

        Perfect for picnics

        These strawberry cookies are perfect for spring picnics and entertaining. Their soft and chewy texture, combined with the flavors of freeze-dried strawberries and chocolate chips, make them a delightful treat to enjoy outdoors. 

        Want more picnic recipes? Try these:

        • Creamy Chicken Salad
        • Rainbow Chickpea Salad
        • Strawberry Energy Bites
        • Veggie Avocado Sandwich
        Strawberry cookies with freeze dried strawberries on plate

        Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

        In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

        Strawberry Cookies Square
        Print Recipe
        5 from 1 vote

        Higher Protein Strawberry Cookies

        These strawberry cookies are a great way to satisfy your sweet tooth with a boost of protein. They're filled with nutrient-dense additions like protein powder, freeze dried strawberries, and chocolate chips of your choice.
        Prep Time10 minutes mins
        Cook Time10 minutes mins
        Total Time20 minutes mins
        Course: Sweet Treat Choices
        Cuisine: American
        Keyword: high protein, picnic, strawberry cookies
        Servings: 24 small cookies
        Calories: 220kcal
        Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

        Ingredients

        • ½ cup 1 stick unsalted butter, softened
        • ½ cup white sugar or 1:1 sugar substitute
        • 1 large egg
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ½ cup vanilla protein powder
        • 1 cup white whole wheat flour or regular white flour (or 1:1 gluten-free flour blend)
        • ½ teaspoon baking powder
        • ¼ teaspoon salt
        • ½ cup freeze-dried strawberries
        • ½ cup chocolate chips of your choice (white chocolate, milk chocolate, or dark chocolate)
        instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

        Instructions

        • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
        • In a large mixing bowl, cream together the softened butter and granulated sweetener until well combined and creamy.
        • Add the egg and vanilla extract to the bowl. Beat the mixture until smooth.
        • In a separate bowl, whisk together the protein powder, flour, baking powder, and a pinch of salt.
        • Gradually add the dry ingredient mixture to the mixing bowl. Stir until a thick dough forms. Gently blend in strawberries and choc chips until incorporated.
        • Use a 1-inch cookie scooper or spoon to roll the dough into small balls (about 1 inch in diameter) and place them on the prepared baking sheet. 
        • Bake the cookies in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, or until the edges are golden brown.*
        • Remove from the oven and let them cool on the baking sheet for a few minutes. Then transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely.
        • Store any extra cookies at room temperature in an airtight container for up to 5 days.

        Notes

        *Air fryer instructions: If you prefer not to use your oven or need to make a smaller batch of cookies, the air fryer is a great alternative. Simply line your air fryer basket with parchment paper that fits properly, then air fry the cookies at 300ºF for 6-7 minutes until the edges turn a lovely golden brown. This method allows for quick and efficient baking in the air fryer while still achieving delicious results.
        See instructions above for turning these into strawberry cookie bars instead of individual cookies.

        Nutrition

        Serving: 2small cookies | Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 90mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 12g

        save this strawberry cookie recipe on pinterest:

        Pinterest Updated Cookies

        20+ Delicious Smoothie Bowl Recipes

        May 12, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

        In need of some smoothie bowl inspiration? Look no further. I've rounded up 20 of the best smoothie bowl recipes to fuel your mornings. These recipes are vegan or include vegan-friendly options!

        Overhead shot of different smoothie bowl recipes

        This post was first published on June 13, 2021. It was updated with a few additional smoothie bowl recipes on May 12, 2023.

        Table of Contents

        • What is a vegan smoothie bowl?
        • Customize it your way
        • Are smoothie bowls healthy?

          What is a vegan smoothie bowl?

          Smoothies bowls are a thicker version of smoothies served in a bowl with delicious toppings sprinkled over top. To make it vegan, you would omit or substitute any dairy or animal products.

          Customize it your way

          These smoothie bowl recipes are vegan so they contain no animal products or provide vegan substitutions. However, you can easily customize it to fit your dietary preferences. 

          • Yogurt - Many smoothie bowl recipes call for yogurt to add creaminess. Vegan friendly options include almond, oat, or coconut yogurt. If you are not vegan, you can use Greek yogurt or regular yogurt.
          • Milk - In order to break down the frozen ingredients, smoothie bowl recipes will call for a splash of milk. Vegan options would include plant-based milk such as almond, coconut, oat, rice, or soy milk. Non-vegan options would be dairy milk like skim milk or whole milk. 
          • Sweetener - Some recipes may call for a touch of sweetness to compliment the fruit and greens. Vegan friendly sweeteners include agave, maple syrup, or date syrup. Feel free to also use honey if you are not vegan. 

          Are smoothie bowls healthy?

          As a dietitian, I love how smoothie bowls are filled with vibrant fruits and vegetables like berries, beets, cauliflower, spinach, and bananas. All these different colors represent different nutrients that keep us healthy. For example:

          • Blueberries - Blueberries are rich in anthocyanin which provide anti-inflammatory effects.
          • Spinach - Spinach contain a carotenoid called lutein which helps protect against damage to the eyes.
          • Bananas - Bananas are packed with beneficial antioxidants, potassium, and dietary fiber.

          If you have a goal to include more fruits and vegetables in your day, smoothie bowls are a great way to go!

          Need more help creating realistic and actionable goals in the kitchen? Check out my virtual nutrition Coaching + Cooking program.

          Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl
          If you're a PB lover, this one's for you! This protein-packed smoothie bowl is filled with frozen bananas, peanut butter, and lots of crunchy toppings.
          Get Recipe
          Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl 3 scaled
          Chocolate Cherry Smoothie Bowl
          Cherries are in season all summer long. If you find yourself with extras, freeze them and throw them into this delicious chocolate cherry bowl.
          Get Recipe
          chocolate cherry fruit smoothie bowl recipe
          Matcha Smoothie Bowl
          Packed with energizing ingredients like matcha powder, dates, and spinach-this smoothie bowl is perfect for breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up. Top with coconut energy bites and other satisfying toppings of your choice!
          Get Recipe
          Matcha Smoothie Bowl 1 scaled
          Dragon Fruit Smoothie Bowl
          Achieve that Insta-worthy pink smoothie bowl by blending together vibrant fruit and yogurt. As a bonus, berries are packed with immune-supporting vitamin C.
          Get Recipe
          Dragon Fruit Smoothie Bowl 5 e1627532474471
          Cacao Banana Smoothie Bowl
          Bananas + Chocolate...can you think of better combo?? Blend this bowl up for a healthier way to curb your sweet tooth.
          Get Recipe
          banana cacao smoothie bowl square
          Energy-Boosting Green Smoothie
          Blend together frozen bananas, spinach, and protein powder for a protein and fiber-packed bowl. This powerful combo helps us feel more energized throughout the day!
          Get Recipe
          247 energy boosting green smoothie 8
          Chocolate Berry Smoothie Bowl
          Have some extra chocolate protein powder you're not sure what to do with? Add it into this slightly sweet smoothie bowl. Top with extra blueberries and granola for a crunch.
          Get Recipe
          Chocolate Berry Smoothie Bowl 3
          Strawberry Smoothie Bowl
          This strawberry smoothie bowl is completely customizable and super easy to blend together. It tastes just like angel food cake with fresh strawberries on top!
          Get Recipe
          Strawberry Smoothie Bowl 7
          Pineapple Mango Smoothie
          Creamy, thick, and tropical-this smoothie bowl has all the summer feels. Perfect to enjoy on the beach or close your eyes and pretend you're there!
          Get Recipe
          Screen Shot 2021 06 13 at 8.27.54 PM
          Sweet Kale Smoothie Bowl
          Sneak some veggies into your morning bowl with kale-rich in vitamin K, calcium, and fiber. Blend kale together with pineapple and peaches for a nourishing combo.
          Get Recipe
          Sweet Kale
          Blueberry Banana Smoothie Bowl
          This recipe is customizable-choose your favorite plant based milk and protein powder to use. Blended together with frozen bananas and frozen blueberries for a classic combo.
          Get Recipe
          Banana Blueberry Smoothie Bowl
          Acai Berry Bowl
          Acai is a type of berry that grows in South American rainforests. In the United States, you typically find them in frozen packets-perfect to add to smoothie bowls like this one.
          Get Recipe
          acai bowl recipe 6
          Blue Smoothie Bowl
          Blue spirulina is a powder derived from blue-green algae. It's rich in beneficial nutrients like vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. It's also responsible for creating the lovely blue hue for this smoothie bowl.
          Get Recipe
          Vegan Blue Smoothie Bowl 3 e1623617297530
          Beet Smoothie Bowl
          Beets may sound like a strange addition to a smoothie bowl but paired with frozen berries and the result is antioxidant-rich, velvety goodness.
          Get Recipe
          BerryBeetSmoothieBowl BeetoftheWIld MichelleMcCowanPhotography ALLRIGHTSRESERVED 16
          Banana Peach Smoothie Bowl
          Depending on the time of year you can buy fresh peaches and freeze them or opt for pre-frozen peaches at your grocery store. Either way you'll create a sweet and satisfying smoothie bowl.
          Get Recipe
          delicious banana peach smoothie bowl square
          Chocolate Smoothie Bowl
          This healthy chocolate smoothie bowl is a tasty, sweet breakfast loaded with nutrients. It's filled with nourishing ingredients like cauliflower, cocoa powder, and protein powder of your choice.
          Get Recipe
          Chocolate Smoothie Bowl 1
          Pitaya Bowl
          Pitaya (also known as dragonfruit) creates that beautiful bright pink hue. It's also filled with important nutrients like iron, magnesium, and vitamin C.
          Get Recipe
          Pitaya Bowl 2 2
          Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp Smoothie Bowl
          This bowl is a refreshing and healthy version of a classic summer treat. Blend together frozen strawberries, rhubarb, and banana with a touch of almond butter and cinnamon.
          Get Recipe
          strawberry rhubarb crisp smoothie bowl featured 1
          Probiotic Smoothie Bowl
          Start your morning right with this dairy-free probiotic smoothie made with honeydew melon, raspberries, and avocado. To get extra fancy, serve it in a cut melon.
          Get Recipe
          melon smoothie feat image.pngfit6802c900ssl1
          Tropical Smoothie Bowl Recipe
          This satisfying breakfast bowl has a secret ingredient... soft tofu! Tofu packs in extra protein and creaminess.
          Get Recipe
          healthy tropical smoothie bowl recipe 8 e1623637926593
          Avocado Smoothie Bowl
          Blending avocado into smoothie bowls not only adds creaminess but it also adds healthy unsaturated fats. Sprinkle in monkfruit for an extra touch of sweetness.
          Get Recipe
          keto avocado smoothie bowl 1
          Mermaid Smoothie Bowl
          This dietitian-approved smoothie bowl is filled with nourishing ingredients like bananas, citrus, and chia seeds. All blended together with spirulina, which gives it that unique blue-green color.
          Get Recipe
          mermaid smoothie 9 scaled 1

          Looking for more smoothie bowl recipes?

          Check out this "Beautiful Smoothie Bowls" book by Carissa Bonham on Amazon filled with 80 other easy, nutritious bowls. My favorite is the Berries and Cream recipe! 

          What is your favorite smoothie bowl to make? Leave a comment below and let me know.

          save these smoothie bowl recipes on pinterest:

          Peanut butter smoothie bowl

          Chocolate Smoothie Bowl

          April 19, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

          Who says chocolate is reserved just for dessert?! This healthy chocolate smoothie bowl is a tasty, sweet breakfast loaded with nutrients. It's filled with nourishing ingredients like cauliflower, cocoa powder, and protein powder of your choice.

          Chocolate smoothie bowl in coconut bowl

          (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

          Table of Contents

          • Is this chocolate smoothie bowl healthy?
          • Customize it your way
          • What toppings should I use?
          • Where did you get the coconut bowls shown?
            • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

            Is this chocolate smoothie bowl healthy?

            This chocolate smoothie bowl recipe is packed with nutritious ingredients that provide a bunch of health benefits. 

            • Banana: Bananas are a great source of potassium, which helps to regulate blood pressure and support healthy heart function. They're also high in fiber, which can help to promote digestive health and keep you feeling satisfied.
            • Cauliflower: Cauliflower is an excellent source of vitamin C, which is essential for immune function and skin health. Like bananas, it's pretty neutral in taste so it takes on the chocolate flavor.
            • Yogurt: Yogurt is a great source of protein and probiotics, which can help to support gut health and improve digestion. It's also a good source of calcium, which is essential for strong bones and teeth. I like to choose Greek varieties to pack in the most protein.
            • Protein Powder: Protein powder often gets a bad rap, but I think it's a convenient way to give yourself a protein boost with minimal effort. Try adding a scoop to coffee, cereal bars, or mug cakes too.
            • Nut Butter: All types of nut butters contain healthy fats and protein. We call for any nut butter of your choice so you can use your favorite.
            • Dates: Dates are a great way to naturally sweeten this bowl without any added sugars. I prefer Medjool dates which are soft and have a caramel-like taste. Stuffing them with peanut butter is a great snack!
            Chocolate smoothie bowl in coconut bowl next to wooden spoon

            What are the health benefits of cocoa powder?

            Cocoa powder is another key ingredient in this chocolate smoothie bowl recipe. It's a good source of antioxidants called "flavanols". Research has shown these flavanols may help improve heart and brain health.

            Stick with minimally processed cocoa powder and be mindful of any added sugars. We like to use unsweetened cocoa powder.

            Customize it your way

            Like all of my other recipes, this chocolate smoothie bowl is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein powder, nut butter, and milk you want to use.

            • For the protein powder, we love to use a chocolate flavored variety. However, you could use vanilla or another flavor. Feel free to use any type of protein you prefer such as whey protein or a plant-based one.
            • For the nut butter, use whatever you have in your pantry. You can even use a seed butter if you have a nut allergy.
            • For the milk, we love using almond milk but any milk would be great here.
            Chocolate smoothie bowl in coconut bowl

            What toppings should I use?

            The toppings are also totally customizable. Here are some ideas to get you started:

            • To make yours look like the photos shown: add over sliced banana, granola, cocoa nibs, and hemp seeds
            • For a s'mores vibe: add over mini chocolate chips, and mini marshmallows, and crushed graham crackers 
            • For a chocolate covered strawberry vibe: add over sliced strawberries, white chocolate chips, and shaved dark chocolate
            Reusable utensils from Jungle Culture

            Where did you get the coconut bowls shown?

            You know we're all about sustainable kitchen choices. That's why we love using Jungle Culture's reusable straws, utensils, and bowls. They also have a number of other plant-friendly home goods.

            Their products are made from ethically-sourced materials like bamboo and coconut shells. Whereas coconut shells would normally be discarded, using them to create these beautiful bowls gives them another life! Plus, this product has given farmers a secondary income. 

            Additionally, these products are often handmade by artisans in small communities in Vietnam. This provides them with a sustainable income source and helps support local economies. 

            Chocolate smoothie bowl topped with granola and bananas

            Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

            In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

            Chocolate Smoothie Bowl 1
            Print Recipe
            5 from 2 votes

            Chocolate Smoothie Bowl

            This healthy chocolate smoothie bowl is a tasty, sweet breakfast loaded with nutrients. It's filled with nourishing ingredients like cauliflower, cocoa powder, and protein powder of your choice.
            Course: Breakfast Choices
            Keyword: chocolate, smoothie bowl, smoothies
            Servings: 1 smoothie bowl
            Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

            Equipment

            • Coconut Bowls
            • Ninja Foodi Smoothie Bowl Maker

            Ingredients

            Smoothie Ingredients:

            • 1 large banana, sliced and frozen (about 1 cup)
            • ¼ cup frozen cauliflower rice or florets
            • ¼ cup plain or chocolate Greek yogurt
            • 2 tablespoons chocolate protein powder of your choice (whey, soy, pea, etc.)
            • 1 tablespoon unsweetened cocoa powder
            • 1 tablespoon nut butter of your choice (peanut butter, almond butter, cashew butter, etc.)
            • 1 medjool date
            • ¼ cup milk of your choice (dairy, almond, soy, hemp, etc.)

            Toppings of your choice:

            • Sliced bananas
            • Granola
            • Cocoa nibs
            • Berries
            • Shaved dark chocolate
            • Creamy nut butter
            • For a s'mores variation: add over mini chocolate chips, mini marshmallows, and crushed graham crackers
            instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

            Instructions

            • Add all smoothie ingredients to your blender or food processor and secure the lid on.
            • Blend on high speed until ingredients are completely broken down and smooth. If you are using a Ninja Foodi Smoothie Bowl Maker, use the preset "bowl" option.
            • Use a spatula to spoon mixture into a bowl, then add over toppings of your choice.

            save this chocolate smoothie bowl recipe on pinterest:

            Save this smoothie bowl on Pinterest

            Want more chocolate? Try these other sweet recipes:

            • Chocolate Popcorn
            • Avocado Truffles
            • Vegan Crunch Bark
            • Whole Wheat Chocolate Chip Cookies

            Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers

            April 14, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

            These Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers are the perfect vegetarian recipe to meal prep ahead of time. Not only are these stuffed peppers super easy to make, but they're also loaded with nourishing ingredients and flavorful spices! Plus, you get to customize them with any nuts of your choice. This recipe is gluten-free and has vegan options.

            Stuffed Peppers on a plate over a yellow kitchen towel

            (Disclosure note: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. See my disclosure policy for more details.)

            Table of Contents

            • What are stuffed peppers?
              • How do you prep pepper halves?
            • Are these quinoa stuffed peppers healthy?
            • Customize it your way
            • Can you make this recipe vegan?
            • How do you make these vegetarian peppers?
              • 1. Cook your quinoa
              • 2. Stir in spices, nuts, and feta
              • 3. Spoon into peppers
              • 4. Bake until tender
            • Can you air fry these peppers?
            • Other tips and tricks
            • Can you make them ahead of time?
            • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

            What are stuffed peppers?

            Stuffed peppers are an easy and delicious dish to meal prep. Simply hollow out pepper halves, stuff with a prepared mixture, and bake until the peppers are slightly tender. For this recipe, we've created a Mediterranean, vegetarian version filled with fluffy quinoa.

            Quinoa Stuffed Peppers with feta on top

            What peppers should I use?

            You can use any color of sweet bell peppers including red, orange, or yellow peppers. When selecting peppers for this recipe, try to choose ones that are round, firm, and free of blemishes or soft spots. If you have an odd-shaped pepper, it will still work but it may be a bit harder to stuff.

            Yellow, red, and orange bell peppers

            How do you prep pepper halves?

            1. To create the hollowed pepper halves, we like to slice straight down the middle with a chef's knife. 
            2. Then you can use a smaller paring knife to gently cut in front of the stem to remove the core.
            3. Finally, use a small spoon or your fingers to scrap out any extra white skin and seeds. You can also gently tap the back of the pepper to shake extra seeds loose.
            Peppers with core in tact
            Peppers with core and seeds removed
            Prepared pepper halves in white pan

            Are these quinoa stuffed peppers healthy?

            Yes! As a dietitian, I developed this recipe to highlight nutrient-dense ingredients like bell peppers, quinoa, and nuts.

            • Bell Peppers are an excellent source of vitamins C, A, and K. These vitamins are important for immune and skin health. Peppers are also high in antioxidants, which can help reduce the risk of chronic diseases such as cancer and heart disease.
            • Quinoa is a nutrient-dense grain that's high in protein, fiber, and essential vitamins and minerals. It's also gluten-free, making it a great option for those with gluten sensitivities or celiac disease. Quinoa is an excellent source of plant-based protein, making it an ideal option for vegetarians and vegans.
            • Nuts are filled with a good amount of plant-based protein. For example, pistachios pack in 6 grams of plant-based protein per ¼ cup. Nuts are also a good source of fiber and healthy fats. This trio of protein, fiber, and fat makes them a satiating addition to this vegetarian meal. 
            Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers

            Customize it your way

            Like all of my other recipes, this Mediterranean Stuffed Pepper recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what type of nuts you want to use. Here are some different choices:

            • Roasted and Salted Shelled Pistachios - When testing out this recipe, We especially loved using pistachios. They're savory flavor pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean spices. 
            • Almonds - We recommend using roasted almonds if possible. It gives it an extra nutty flavor.
            • Walnuts - Walnuts provide a satisfying crunch alongside a healthy dose of protein and healthy fats.
            • Pine nuts - Pine nuts tend to be more expensive but their buttery flavor is so good! If you use pine nuts, there's no need to chop them since they are already a smaller nut.

            Can you make this recipe vegan?

            This recipe uses feta cheese, which is a dairy product. However, if you follow a plant-based lifestyle, you can easily swap the feta cheese or a vegan alternative. This simple swap will make this recipe completely vegan friendly.

            How do you make these vegetarian peppers?

            You'll love making these Mediterranean stuffed peppers because they use minimal dishes and are ready to go in a matter of minutes. 

            1. Cook your quinoa

            Quinoa can be somewhat bland, right? So we've decided to pump up the flavor. You can do this by first sauteing a shallot in the quinoa pot. Then, I always like to add over dry quinoa and toast it. This will bring out a deeper, nutty flavor. Finally, we like to cook the quinoa in broth but you could also swap for water. 

            After about 15-20 minutes, you'll reveal fluffy quinoa that's ready for the rest of the ingredients.

            Toasting quinoa in a pan
            Fluffy cooked quinoa before adding to stuffed peppers

            2. Stir in spices, nuts, and feta

            The less dishes, the better. That's why I've made this recipe as simple as possible. After the quinoa is done, you can stir in the spices, nuts, and feta cheese to the same pot.

            Cooked quinoa with pistachios stirred in

            3. Spoon into peppers

            This mixture is truly amazing on its own, but this is where you'll carefully spoon it into the prepared pepper halves. I like to use a regular spoon to add it over the pepper then gently push down to get as much of the quinoa in as possible.

            Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers 9
            Before Baking
            Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers 17
            After Baking

            4. Bake until tender

            Add to your preheated oven and let it bake. It will take around 40-45 minutes to achieve a nice, tender texture. If you're impatient, that's okay. You can pull them out sooner, you'll just have more of a raw, crunchy pepper.

            Can you air fry these peppers?

            We are big air fryer fans and this recipe passes the test. Simple air fry at the same temperature 325ºF for about 10 minutes.

            Before air frying
            After air frying

            Other tips and tricks

            Here's some tips to keep in mind for these Quinoa Stuffed Peppers:

            • We like to add the feta before baking to achieve a crunchy, slightly charred feta on top. If you prefer a softer feta, wait until after baking to sprinkle the feta on top.
            • In the instructions, you'll notice we let the peppers rest for about 5 minutes. This lets the peppers become slightly more tender and allows the filling to set. 
            • If you want to add meat to these peppers, we recommend mixing in a small amount of cooked and cubed chicken or cooked ground beef to the quinoa mixture before stuffing the peppers.
            • We also love enjoying these stuffed peppers with a fried egg on top for breakfast!
            Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers in white pan

            Can you make them ahead of time?

            Yes! These vegetarian peppers are an excellent option for meal prep. We like to stuff the peppers with the quinoa mixture then store them in the fridge until ready to bake.

            How do you store them?

            If you have leftovers, you can store the stuffed peppers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. To reheat, simply microwave them for 1-2 minutes or until heated through. 

            If you want to freeze the quinoa stuffed peppers, wrap them individually in plastic wrap or vacuum seal and store them in the freezer for up to 3 months. To reheat, thaw them in the fridge overnight and then microwave them for 1-2 minutes or until heated through.

            Red, yellow, and orange stuffed pepper

            Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

            In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

            Square Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers 16 copy
            Print Recipe
            4.50 from 2 votes

            Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers

            These Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers are a flavorful vegetarian recipe to meal prep ahead of time!
            Prep Time20 minutes mins
            Cook Time1 hour hr
            Total Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
            Course: Main Dish Choices
            Cuisine: Mediterranean
            Keyword: air fryer, mediterranean, quinoa, stuffed peppers
            Servings: 4 servings
            Calories: 487kcal
            Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

            Equipment

            • Pistachios
            • Whole Almonds
            • Pre-rinsed Quinoa
            • Walnuts

            Ingredients

            • 2 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
            • 1 shallot, diced
            • 1 cup pre-rinsed, uncooked quinoa
            • 2 cups vegetable broth
            • 1 teaspoon dried parsley
            • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
            • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
            • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
            • ½ teaspoon onion powder
            • ½ teaspoon paprika
            • ½ teaspoon black pepper
            • 1 cup nuts of your choice, roughly chopped (We especially love to use roasted pistachios but you can also use almonds, walnuts, pine nuts, etc.)
            • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese, plus more for topping (swap for vegan feta for vegan version)
            • 4 sweet bell peppers color of your choice, halved and seeds removed (red, yellow, or orange peppers) - you'll end up with 8 halves in total
            instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

            Instructions

            • Preheat oven to 375ºF.
            • Heat oil in a medium-sized pot over medium heat. Add shallot and quinoa and cook for 1-2 minutes until quinoa is slightly toasted.
            • Pour over broth, stir, and let mixture come to a boil. Reduce heat to low, cover with a lid, and let simmer for 15-20 minutes until the water has been absorbed.
            • Remove pot from the heat and let cool for 5 minutes. To that same pot (because we're all about less dishes), add over all spices, chopped nuts, and feta cheese. Gently stir to combine.
            • Add peppers to a large 9x13 inch pan. Using a large spoon, stuff quinoa mixture evenly over prepared pepper halves. Top each pepper with a sprinkle more of feta cheese.* 
            • Bake stuffed peppers for 40-45 minutes until peppers are tender and feta cheese is golden brown on top. Remove from oven, add foil on top of pan, and let rest for 5 minutes.**
            • Alternative Air Frying Instructions:Add peppers to air fryer basket and cook at 350ºF for 10 minutes. Let rest in the air fryer basket for 5 minutes before serving.

            Video

            Notes

            *Feta Note: Adding the feta before baking will result in crunchy, slightly charred feta on top. If you prefer a softer feta, wait until AFTER baking to sprinkle on top.
            **Resting Note: You can skip the resting step but I find it allows the peppers to become slightly more tender before enjoying.

            Nutrition

            Serving: 2stuffed pepper halves | Calories: 487kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 29g | Sodium: 820mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 12g

            save this quinoa stuffed pepper recipe on pinterest:

            Save these Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers on Pinterest

            Want more? Try these other bell pepper recipes:

            • Sweet Chili Chicken Stir Fry
            • Rainbow Chickpea Salad
            • One Pot Chili
            • Brown Rice Lentil Stuffed Peppers
            • Easy Pasta Salad
            • « Previous Page
            • 1
            • 2
            • 3
            • 4
            • 5
            • 6
            • 7
            • Next Page »

            Hi, I'm Mackenzie!

            Welcome to Cheerful Choices! Here you’ll find customizable recipes with ingredients “of your choice.” As a dietitian, I also help you gain kitchen confidence through my “Coaching + Cooking” program.

            about me

            Meal Prep Ready

            • Pistachio Lettuce Wraps 14 scaled
              Meal Prep Chicken Lettuce Wraps with Pistachios
            • Customizable Power Bowl Featured Image
              Customizable Power Bowl Recipe Template
            • Customizable Protein Pancakes Featured Image
              Customizable Protein Pancakes
            • One Pot Tomato Basil Pasta Featured Image
              One Pot Tomato Basil Pasta

            Dietitian Pro Tips

            • Meal Plan2
              Your Guide to Setting SMART Nutrition Goals
            • C49A4215
              10 Immune Boosting Foods + Immunity Shot Recipe to Try
            • Quinoa Kitchen Confidence
              5 Tips to Improve Your Kitchen Confidence
            • Vegetable Curry 4 scaled
              How to Reuse Leftover Food

            Footer

            • Contact
            • Shop
            • Privacy Policy
            • Terms
            • ↑ back to top

            Rate This Recipe

            Your vote:




            Let us know what you thought of this recipe:

            Loved it! I customized this recipe by using...
            My family loved this one!
            Thank you for sharing this recipe, it was delicious!

            Or write in your own words:

            A rating is required
            A name is required
            An email is required